May 10, 2024  
Official Course Syllabi 2020-2021 
    
Official Course Syllabi 2020-2021 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Syllabi


 

Metal Craft Theory

  
  • ATMT 1750 - Plastic Product Design & Tooling

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A course focusing on plastic product and tooling design, including the product design process, designing for assembly, machining, finishing and decorating of plastic. Material selection is reviewed including injection systems, ejection systems, undercuts and mold components. Students will complete a comprehensive plastic product design.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the plastic product design process, plastic product performance requirements, plastic processing methods, optimizing plastic product function, and reducing manufacturing costs.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on plastic product design process, list and describe the elements of sequential plastic product design process with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on plastic product performance requirements, list and describe the plastic product design and processing requirements required for successful plastics product performance with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on plastic processing methods, list and describe the processing method design requirements for successful plastic product design with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on optimizing plastic product function, list and describe design elements for optimizing plastic product function with 80% accuracy.
    5. Using the material presented on reducing manufacturing cost of plastic products, list and describe the design elements for reducing manufacturing costs with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the plastic prototyping and testing, general plastic product design, structural plastic product design, and plastic product design for assembly.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on plastics product prototyping and testing, describe the plastic prototyping process and testing to gain product performance information for successful production plastic product design and tooling design.
    2. Using the material presented on general plastic product design, list the general plastic product design requirements for thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on structural plastic product design, list the structural plastic product design requirements for thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on plastics product design for assembly, list and describe the interference fits used in plastics product design for successful assembly with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe machining and finishing processes for plastics products, painting, plating and decorating plastics products, and mold design for plastics products.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on machining and finishing processes for plastics products list and describe the machining and finishing processes, list the tools, tool geometry, speeds and feeds for machining and finishing plastics, and describe the problems inherent with machining and finishing thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on painting, plating and decorating plastics, list and describe the processes and product applications, which enhance plastics products appearance and function with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on mold design for plastics products, list and describe the mold design requirements for the plastics processing methods for functional molds and related tooling with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Orientation to Course: The Design Process, Defining Plastic Part Requirements
    2. Processing Methods, Optimizing Product Function, Reducing Manufacturing Costs and Prototype Testing
    3. General Design
    4. Structural Design
    5. Design for Assembly
    6. Machining and Finishing
    7. Painting, Plating and Decorating
    8. Mold Design
    9. Mold Design Check List

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATMT 1950 - Science Physics 1: Mechanics

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATAM 2150 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator

    A study of measurement; molecular motion; liquid pressure and Pascal’s law; force systems; rectilinear motion; work power and energy; momentum and simple machine elements. Emphasis is on practical application utilizing the English engineering system of units.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use the metric and the N.A.S. units of measurements to solve physics problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of IP measurements, the student will determine the length, area, and volume of rectangular and cylindrical objects to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of metric measurements, the student will determine the length, area, and volume of rectangular and cylindrical objects to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of IP dimensions, the student will determine the metric equivalent to an accuracy of 70%.
    4. Given a set of metric dimensions, the student will determine the IP equivalent to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between weight and mass.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the formula F=ma, the student will identify F as the weight, m as the mass and a as the acceleration or gravity to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given the formula F=ma and a series of realistic situations using IP and metric units, the student will determine the weight or the mass of an object to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given the formula F=ma and the various effects of gravity on earth and the moon using IP and metric units, the student will determine the weight or the mass of an object to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to state the law of conservation of momentum and apply it to physical problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the definition of Newton’s Third Law, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the definition of momentum, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given the formula p=mv, the student will identify p as the momentum, m as the mass and v as the velocity to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given the formulas p=mv and p1=p2 and a series of realistic situations using IP and metric units, the student will prove the conservation of momentum, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the concept of work and apply it to practical problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the definition of work, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given the formula W=Fs, the student will identify W as work, F as the force applied in the direction of motion and s as the displacement to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given the formula W=Fs and a series of realistic situations using IP and metric units, the student will determine the work performed, force applied or displacement of an object to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe how a machine is used to transfer energy from one place to another.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the definitions of effort, resistance, and mechanical advantage, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given the formula FRxsR=FExsE and a series of realistic situations using IP and metric units, the student will determine the mechanical advantage, force or distance to an accuracy of 70%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Measurement and the Metric System
    2. Vectors: Magnitude and Displacement
    3. Motion: Velocity and Acceleration
    4. Force: Inertia, Acceleration, Friction, Gravity & Weight
    5. Force: Action & Reaction, Momentum, Collisions
    6. Force: Concurrent Forces, Concurrent Forces in Equilibrium
    7. Force: Torque, Parallel Forces, Center of Gravity
    8. Work and Energy: Work, Power
    9. Work and Energy: Energy, Conservation of Energy
    10. Rotational Motion: Measurement, Curved Path, Gears, Pulleys
    11. Simple Machines: Mechanical Advantage, Levers, Wheel and Axle, Pulleys
    12. Simple Machines: Inclined Plane, Screw, Compound Machines
    13. Matier: Properties of Matier, Solids, Liquids, Gases, Density

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATMT 2210 - Plastic Mold & Die Cast Die Theory

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Plastic molding processes and the construction and engineering requirements of molds used for each molding process. The various mold making techniques, materials and fabrication techniques used to manufacture molds. Engineering and design specifications for mold construction and costing are studied.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe mold design basics for the plastics molding processes and die casting processes which include size of mold base, required plates, plate thickness, types of tool steels, ejection stroke, injection system, press type and size.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on mold design basics, list and describe the plastics molding processes, list and describe mold base sizing, required plates, plate thickness, types of tool steels, ejection system, and injection system with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on mold design basics, list and describe the die casting processes, list and describe mold base sizing, required plates, plate thickness, types of tool steels, ejection system and injection system with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on mold design basics, list and describe the plastics molding and die casting machine tools for plastics and die casting including press type and size with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe plastics mold and die cast mold action areas, plastics mold and die cast mold runners, gating and venting, plastics mold and die cast mold temperature control.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold action actions to eliminate die lock conditions with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold runner systems required to inject materials into the molds with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold gating and venting systems required to inject materials into the molds with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold temperature control systems required for the molding processes with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe plastics mold and die cast mold alignment systems, mold repair procedures, mold protection and storage and plastics and die cast product defects related to molds.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold alignment systems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold repair procedures including welding processes with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe mold protection and the preparation requirements for short term and long term storage with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on plastics molds and die cast molds, list and describe the plastics and die cast product defects as they relate to mold design and mold construction with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Injection Molding Concept and the Importance of the Mold
    2. Mold Design Basics
    3. Mold Construction Basics
    4. Action Areas of the Mold
    5. Mold Runners, Gating and Venting
    6. Mold Temperature Control
    7. Mold Alignment Concepts
    8. Mold Repairing, Protecting and Storing
    9. Product Defects and Molds
    10. Mold Design Check List

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATMT 2350 - Metallurgy Heat Treatment of Ferrous Alloys

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    First six weeks covers basic metallurgy, iron-carbon diagram, S Curves, tempering curves, mechanics of quenching, furnace design, furnace atmospheres, theory of alloy additions and liquid heating baths. Seventh through 14th weeks involve the study of characteristics, selection and heat treatment of tool steels from water hardening to high speed steels and special alloys.

    Location: South Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the principles of heat, heat treatment operations, heat treatment equipment, heat treatment procedures, and heat treatment quench media.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Using the material presented on the principles of heat, describe specific heat of metals and heat capacity of metals as they relate to heat treatment of metals with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on heat treatment operations and equipment, list and describe heat treatment operations and heat treatment equipment with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on heat treatment procedures and heat treatment quench media, list and describe heat treatment procedures and quench media with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the heat treatment effects of carbon and other alloying elements, heat treatment of carbon tool steels, heat treatment of oil hardening tool steels, heat treatment of air hardening tool steels.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Using the material presented on the heat treatment effects of carbon and alloying elements and concentrations on carbon steels, list and describe heat treatment effects on metallurgical structure and properties of carbon steels based on carbon content, alloying elements and concentrations with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on heat treatment of carbon tool steels, list and describe heat treatment processes, heat treatment effects and resulting metallurgical properties of carbon tool steels, based on carbon content with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on heat treatment of oil hardening and air hardening tool steels, list and describe the processes and resulting metallurgical properties of oil hardening and air hardening tool steels heat treatment based on alloying elements and concentrations with 80% content.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe heat treatment of hot work die steels, heat treatment of high speed tool steels, heat treatment of special purpose steels and metallurgical structural defects in die and tool steels.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Using the material presented on heat treatment of hot work die steels, list and describe the metallurgical structure and property changes resulting from heat treatment of hot work die steels with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on heat treatment of high‐speed tool steels, list and describe the metallurgical structure and property changes resulting from heat treatment of high‐speed tool steels with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on heat treatment of special purpose steels, list and describe the alloying, metallurgical structure and property changes resulting from heat treatment of special purpose steels with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on metallurgical structural defects in die and tool steels, list and describe the types of defects found in die and tool steels, defect concentrations allowable in die and tool steels, and property effects of defects on performance of die and tool steels with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Course
    2. General Principles of Heat
    3. Heat Treating Operations
    4. Equipment and Procedure Used in Heat Treatment
    5. Relation of Cooling Power of Quench Media to the Steel Liquid Baths Used for Heating Steels, Function of Quenching
    6. Effects of Carbon and Alloy Addition
    7. Carbon Tool Steel
    8. Oil Hardening Tool Steel
    9. Air Hardening Tool Steel
    10. Hot Work Die Steels
    11. High Speed Tool Steels
    12. Special Purpose Steels
    13. Material Defects in Tool Steel

    Primary Faculty
    Kacir, John
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Music

  
  • MUSC 1030 - Music Appreciation

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Humanities course for non-music majors wishing to increase their knowledge and discrimination of music. Various types and styles of music are presented and discussed with regard to the elements of music and how they function in each style. Concerts and outstanding programs are related to the course.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the elements of music.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define and describe the nature and structure of melody.
    2. Name, define and describe the nature and structure of rhythm.
    3. Name, define and describe the nature and structure of harmony.
    4. Name, define and describe the nature and structure of tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify the instruments of the orchestra.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe by sight and sound the instruments of the string family.
    2. Name, define, and describe by sight and sound the instruments of the woodwind family.
    3. Name, define, and describe by sight and sound the instruments of the brass family.
    4. Name, define, and describe by sight and sound the instruments of the percussion family.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the Absolute Forms utilized in one of the Great Period Styles of Western Art Music.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe the symphony of the classical periods.
    2. Name, define, and describe the concerto of the classical period.
    3. Name, define, and describe the sonata of the classical period.
    4. Name, define, and describe the string quartet of the classical period.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to listen to randomly played works and identify four features of each.

    Objectives:

    1. Name the randomly played work by name (form, key, and movement).
    2. Name the randomly played work by composer.
    3. Name the randomly played work by form or design.
    4. Name the randomly played work by period style.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Elements of Music
      1. Melody
      2. Rhythm
      3. Harmony
      4. Musical Texture
      5. Musical Form
      6. Tempo and Dynamics
    2. Instruments of the Orchestra
      1. Musical Instruments I
      2. Musical Instruments II
      3. Musical Ensembles
    3. The Organization of Musical Sounds
      1. Musical Systems
      2. Aspects of the Major-Minor system
    4. Focus on Form
      1. The Development of Musical Themes
      2. The Classic Forms
    5. The Classical Spirit
      1. Classicism in Music
    6. Classical Chamber Music
    7. The Classical Symphony
      1. The Nature of the Symphony
        1. Beethoven and the Symphony in Transition
        2. Beethoven’s “Sym. #5 in Cm,” Mvts. I & II
        3. Beethoven’s “Sym. #9 in Dm,” Mvt. IV
    8. The 18th Century Concerto and Sonata
      1. The Classical Concerto
        1. Mozart’s “Piano Concerto in G Major,” Mvt. I
      2. The Classical Sonata
        1. Beethoven’s “Piano Sonata in C minor,” Mvt. III
    9. From Classicism to Romanticism
    10. The Romantic Movement
      1. The Spirit of Romanticism
      2. Romanticism in Music
    11. Romantic Program Music
      1. The Nature of Program Music
        1. The Symphonic Poem: Smetana’s “The Moldau”
        2. The Concert Overture: Tchaikovsky’s “Romeo and Juliet Overture-Fantasy”
    12. Choral and Dramatic Music in the 19th Century
      1. Romantic Opera
      2. Wagner and the Music Drama
        1. Wagner’s “Die Walkure”
    13. The Impression Eras
      1. Claude Debussy and Impressionism
        1. Debussy’s “Prelude to the Afternoon of the Faun”
        2. Ravel’s “Piano Concerto for the Left Hand”
    14. The Early Twentieth Century
      1. Main Currents in Early Twentieth Century Music
      2. New Elements of Musical Style
      3. Stravinsky and the Revitalization of Rhythm
        1. Stravinsky’s “The Rite of Spring”
      4. Schoenberg and the Second Viennese School
        1. Schoenberg’s “Pierrot Lunaire”
        2. “A Survivor from Warsaw”
    15. The Nationalism of the Twentieth Century
      1. The European Scene
        1. Bartok, “The Miraculous Mandarian”
      2. The American Scene
        1. Ives, “Symphony No. 2”
    16. The New Music
      1. New Directions
      2. Contemporary Composers
        1. Cage
      3. Some Current Trends
        1. Minimalism

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1040 - World Music

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An introductory course exploring the music cultures of the World. It is designed to provide both a contrast and comparison of musical traditions that exist within various cultures throughout the world in an effort to better understand how those similarities and differences create both cultural unity and rich cultural diversity.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to utilize terminology as it applies to music of various cultures.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Define concepts and terminology, including:
      1. Melody.
      2. Rhythm.
      3. Timbre.
      4. Tonality.
      5. Texture.
      6. Form.
    2. Discuss the aspects of the terminology that are similar within the various cultures that have been explored.
    3. Discuss the aspects of the terminology that are unique within each culture that has been explored.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to communicate how the music within each culture that has been explored relates to the historic and contemporary aspects of that culture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss various aspects of each culture that has been presented.
      1. Social.
      2. Political.
      3. Religious.
      4. Historic.
    2. Discuss how the music reinforces and integrates into those cultural aspects.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will able to make correlations between ethnic music and their own culture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will

    1. Discuss how classical music of western society has influenced the music of various cultures that have been presented.
    2. Discuss how popular music of western society has influenced the music of various cultures that have been presented.
    3. Discuss how the music of various cultures that have been presented has influenced classical music of western society.
    4. Discuss how the music of various cultures that have been presented has influenced popular music of western society.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Music of Central Asia
    Music of South Asia
    Music of Africa
    Music of the Caribbean
    Music of Korea
    Music of Japan
    Music of Latin America
    Music of Native America
    Music of Rural America
    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1050 - Music Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    The study of beginning music fundamentals such as note names, clefs, scales, intervals, and chords, an analysis of simple melodic and rhythmic structures, and an introduction to the piano. Recommended for beginners and those needing preparation for Theory 1 and Ear Training 1.

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe that Element of Music called “the Staff” and its associative structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe pitch, lines, and spaces of the great staff.
    2. Name, define, and describe the treble and bass clefs.
    3. Name, define, and describe octave names called C.
    4. Name, define, and locate octave names on the piano keyboard.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe that Element of Music called “Rhythm” and its associate structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe pulse and duration of sound and silence.
    2. Name, define, and describe symbols called notes.
    3. Name, define, and describe simple and compound meters.
    4. Name, define, and describe measures and bar lines.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe that element of music called the “Scale” and its associate structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe the octave, the half step, and the whole step.
    2. Name, define, and describe the diatonic major scale.
    3. Name, define, and describe the diatonic minor scale.
    4. Name, define, and describe the sharp, flat, chromatic, and natural signs on the staff and the piano keyboard.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe that Element of Music call “the Chord” and its associative structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and describe harmony and chords.
    2. Name, define, and construct major, minor, diminished, and augmented triads.
    3. Name, define, and construct single triads and seventh chords in root and inverted positions.
    4. Name, define, and construct chord progressions using the tonic, subdominant, and dominant triads and seventh chord in root and inverted positions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Staff
      1. Pitch
      2. Great Staff
      3. Treble and Bass Clefs
      4. Note Identification
    2. Introduction to the Keyboard
      1. Notes on the Keyboard
      2. Chromatic Notes
      3. Octave Names
    3. Rhythm
      1. Pulse and Duration
      2. Music Notes
      3. Staff and Rest Notation
      4. Measure Structure
      5. Meter and Time Signature
    4. Scales
      1. Pitch
      2. Octave
      3. Half Steps
      4. Whole Steps
      5. Diatonic Major Scales
      6. Diatonic Minor Scales
    5. Intervals
      1. Melodic Style
      2. Harmonic Style
      3. Major Intervals
      4. Minor Intervals
      5. Perfect Intervals
      6. Diminished Intervals
      7. Augmented Intervals
    6. Chord Construction
      1. The Triad and Seventh Chords
      2. The Tonic (I) Triad
      3. The Subdominant (IV) Triad
      4. The Dominant (V) Triad and (V7) Seventh Chords
      5. The Above Chords in 1st and 2nd Inversions

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1060 - Theory 1

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Vocal or instrumental experience

    Corequisites: MUSC 1160

    Study of written harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structures, including scale, triad construction, and inversion. Principal triads only. Includes correlated keyboard work.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and name all major and minor key signatures.

    Objectives:

    1. From printed music, name and define the major and relative minor key.
    2. From printed music, identify the specific mode (major/minor).
    3. Given a key signature, name the major or minor tonality.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and spell all triads on the tonic, sub-dominant and dominant scale degrees in major and minor keys.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a major or minor key signature, name the notes in the tonic triad.
    2. Given a key signature, explain how to find the sub-dominant and dominant scale degrees.
    3. Given a key signature, name the notes in the sub-dominant and dominant triads.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The fundamental of music notation
      1. Pitch in both common clefs
      2. Scales - major and minor
      3. Intervals
      4. Key signatures
      5. Rhythm and meter
    2. Overview of melodic, harmonic and rhythmic materials
    3. Interval and chord construction
    4. Rhythm - simple and compound meter
    5. The melodic line
      1. Pitch
      2. Rhythm
      3. Form
    6. Chord connection
      1. Cadence writing - authentic and plagal
      2. Use of the principle triads in major and minor keys
      3. Figured bass
    7. Chord inversions in harmonization

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1070 - Theory 2

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1060

    Corequisites: MUSC 1170

    Study of written harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structures, including chord progressions involving triads and seventh chords, non-harmonic tones, and simple modulation. Includes correlated keyboard harmony.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify the use of non‐harmonic tones.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, identify, and write passing tones and neighbor tones with figured bass symbols.
    2. Name, define, identify, and write suspensions and retardations with figured bass symbols.
    3. Name, define, identify, and write appoggiaturas and escape tones with figured bass symbols.
    4. Name, define, identify, and write anticipations and pedals with figured bass symbols.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify the leading‐tone triad and the supertonic triad.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, identify, and write the diminished triad.
    2. Name, define, identify, and write the leading tone triad in a harmonic progression.
    3. Name, define, identify, and write the supertonic triad.
    4. Name, define, identify, and write the supertonic triad in a harmonic progression.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify the submediant triad, the mediant triad, the dominant seventh chord, and the supertonic seventh chord.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, identify, and write the subdominant triad in a harmonic progression.
    2. Name, define, identify, and write the mediant triad in a harmonic progression.
    3. Name, define, identify, and write the dominant seventh chord in a harmonic progression.
    4. Name, define, identify, and write the supertonic seventh chord in a harmonic progression.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify secondary triad chords and elementary modulations.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, identify, and write the secondary dominant chord.
    2. Name, define, identify, and write the secondary dominant chord in a harmonic progression.
    3. Name, define, identify, and write the modulation from a major key to its dominant major.
    4. Name, define, identify, and write the modulation from a minor key to its relative major.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Leading‐Tone Triad, Supertonic Triad
      1. Root movement
      2. Harmonic progression
      3. Writing to and from the Diminished Triad
      4. Keyboard harmony
    2. Non‐Harmonic Tones I
      1. Defining non‐harmonic tones
      2. Passing tone
      3. Neighbor tone
    3. Non‐Harmonic Tones II
      1. Suspension
      2. Retardation
      3. Anticipation
      4. Appoggiatura
      5. Escaped Tone
      6. Pedal Tone
    4. The Dominant Seventh and Supertonic Seventh Chords
      1. Characteristics of the dominant seventh chord
      2. Characteristics of the supertonic seventh chord
      3. Characteristics of the keyboard harmony
    5. The Submediant and Mediant Triads
      1. Write the Submediant Triad
      2. Write the Mediant Triad
      3. New progressions
      4. Keyboard harmony
    6. The V and VII Triads
      1. The minor dominant
      2. The subtonic Triad
      3. The Phrygian cadence
      4. Keyboard harmony
    7. Secondary Dominant Chords/Elementary Modulation
      1. Chromaticism
      2. Secondary dominant chords
      3. Modulation
      4. Keyboard harmony

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1160 - Ear Training 1

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: MUSC 1060

    Melodic dictation in one key, harmonic progressions involving principal triads, rhythmic dictation. Sight-singing diatonic exercises.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to sight sing exercise from diatonic major and minor scales using solfeggio syllables.

    Objectives:

    1. Sight‐sing melodic exercises drawn from major and minor patterns with the correct rhythm.
    2. Sight‐sing exercises derived from melodies based on the ‘broken’ chords of the tonic and dominant.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform rhythmic exercises by counting and clapping.

    Objectives:

    1. Count aloud and clap rhythms from the printed music involving simple meters at moderate tempo.
    2. Count aloud and clap rhythms from the printed music involving compound meters at moderate tempo.
    3. Transcribe rhythms in the proper meter when played from the piano or clapped using simple and compound time and employing no more than eight notes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name and notate melodies when played from the piano.

    Objectives:

    1. Transcribe on staff paper simple diatonic melodies played as dictation from the piano.
    2. Transcribe rhythms in the proper meter when played from the piano or clapped using simple and compound time and employing no more than eight notes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sight‐singing
      1. Stepwise movement plus intervals in the tonic; simple meters
      2. Stepwise movement plus intervals of the tonic; use of major keys, treble and bass clef, dotted notes etc./compound time
      3. Intervals in the V triad; intervals of the third, fourth, and sixth
      4. Intervals of the V and V7 chords; compound time
      5. The C clefs, alto and tenor
      6. Intervals in the IV triad; simple time
    2. Melodic dictation
      1. Conjunct melodic lines
      2. Melodies in minor
      3. Melodies based on the tonic with some disjunct lines
      4. Chordal skips
      5. Cut time, 3/8 time
      6. Embellishing tones, non harmonic tones
    3. Harmonic Dictation
      1. Identifying intervals
      2. Identifying major, minor, diminished, and augmented triads
      3. Identifying the tonic, sub‐dominant, and dominant triads
      4. Isolating soprano, alto, tenor, and bass from the given triads

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1170 - Ear Training 2

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1160

    Corequisites: MUSC 1070

    Melodic dictation involving chromatics, harmonic dictation involving all diatonic triads and seventh chords, and rhythmic dictation. Sight-singing diatonic and chromatic exercises.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and transcribe dictated melodic exercises both melodic and rhythmic components.

    Objectives: Name, define, and transcribe melodic dictation exercises with:

    1. Consideration of scale and triad shapes.
    2. Consideration of the dominant triad and dominant seventh chord.
    3. Dotted rhythms and sixteenth notes.
    4. Consideration of the subdominant triad and the supertonic triad.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and transcribe dictated harmonic progressions expressing soprano pitches, bass pitches, and figured bass symbols.

    Objectives: Name, define, and transcribe dictated harmonic progressions using the:

    1. Primary triads
    2. Supertonic and leading tone triads.
    3. Dominant seventh and supertonic seventh chords.
    4. Submediant and mediant triads.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and identify rhythm and meter.

    Objectives: Name, define, and identify:

    1. Simple time; the beat and its division into two parts.
    2. Compound time; the beat and its division into three parts.
    3. Subdivision of the beat; the simple beat into four parts.
    4. Subdivision of the beat; the compound beat into six parts.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to sight‐sing melodic exercises using solfeggio syllables.

    Objectives: Sight‐sing melodic exercises using:

    1. Intervals from diatonic scales.
    2. Intervals from the dominant seventh chord.
    3. Chromatic notes of the secondary dominant.
    4. Chromatic notes in elementary modulations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Melodic Dictation
      1. Scales and shapes
      2. Dominant triad and dominant seventh chord
      3. Dotted rhythms and dotted sixteenth notes
      4. Subdominant triad and supertonic triad
    2. Harmonic Dictation
      1. Primary Triads
      2. Supertonic and leading tone triads
      3. Dominant seventh and supertonic seventh chords
      4. Submediant and mediant triads
    3. Rhythm and Meter
      1. Simple time
      2. Compound time
      3. Subdivision in simple time
      4. Subdivision in compound time
    4. Sight‐singing
      1. Intervals from the diatonic scale
      2. Intervals from the dominant seventh chord
      3. Chromatic notes from the secondary triad
      4. Chromatic notes in elementary modulations

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1260 - Piano 1

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Piano classes MUSC 1260 and MUSC 1270, each 2 contact hours, are recommended for beginners, elementary education majors, and music majors.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and apply a precise seating posture and hand position at the piano keyboard.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe and apply a seating position that is centered, squared, and properly distanced from the piano keyboard.
    2. Describe and apply the physical shape of the arm, wrist, hand, and finger positions at the piano keyboard.
    3. Describe and apply the attack and release of the single finger stroke and release at the piano keyboard.
    4. Describe and apply the attack and release of consecutive finger strokes at the piano keyboard.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and read rudimentary music notation.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and identify the keys of the piano and the corresponding location on the grand staff.
    2. Name, define, and identify the treble and bass clefs, ledger lines, bar lines, and measures.
    3. Name, define, and identify the time signatures, meters, note values, and rest values.
    4. Name, define, and identify the key signatures and accidentals.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and perform technical exercises.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and perform etudes, hands together, with an emphasis on the contraction of the five‐finger hand position.
    2. Name, define, and perform etudes, hands together, with emphasis on the stretching of the five‐finger hand position.
    3. Name, define, and perform select single octaves scales, hands together.
    4. Name, define, and perform select double octave scales, hands together.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and perform expressive melodies with easy harmonic accompaniments.

    Objectives:

    1. Name, define, and perform songs in contrasting meters and rhythms.
    2. Name, define, and perform songs in contrasting dynamics and articulations.
    3. Name, define, and perform songs in different keys and tempos.
    4. Name, define, and perform songs in keys requiring knowledge of primary triads and dominant seventh chords.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the Elements of Music
      1. The piano keyboard and the grand staff
      2. Clefs
      3. Ledger line
      4. Bar lines
      5. Time signatures, note values, and rest values
      6. Posture and hand position
      7. Fingering
    2. Playing the Piano
      1. The five‐finger position
      2. Beginning pieces
      3. More melodies and folk tunes in the five‐finger position
      4. Three counts to a measure
      5. Dotted notes
      6. Dynamic marks indicating a gradual change in the degree of power
      7. Introduction to accidentals
    3. Major Scales and Etudes
      1. The thumb
      2. Hand contraction
      3. Practicing scales Shifting hand positions and related fingering patterns
      4. Six counts to a measure
      5. A note about fingering
      6. New hand position in the key of G
    4. Theory and Use of Chords
      1. Songs with easy accompaniments
      2. Primary Triads
      3. Primary Triads with seventh chords and inversions

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1270 - Piano 2

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1260

    Piano classes MUSC 1260 and MUSC 1270, each 2 contact hours, are recommended for beginners, elementary education majors, and music majors.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to play the C, G, D, A, B and F major scales, hands together, two octaves.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the key signature.
    2. Demonstrate the fingering pattern.
    3. Perform at a moderate and consistent tempo.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to play two carols (Away in a Manger and Silent Night).

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and count the rhythm.
    2. Coordinate the hands in four part playing.
    3. Perform at a tempo commensurate with accepted practice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Review of Piano 1
    2. Columbiana & Scottish Folk Song
    3. A & E major scales of review of same
    4. Pieces in A & E (Toccata hands separately)
    5. B major scale and “Folk Song”
    6. F major scale, chord writing, pedaling
    7. F major pieces with pedal
    8. F major pieces with pedal
    9. Minor scales in theory and practice (three forms)
    10. Same plus chord writing and playing
    11. Minor key pieces: English Carol, Go Down Moses, Aria and Minuet
    12. Minor key pieces: English Carol, Go Down Moses, Aria and Minuet
    13. Shostakovich “Waltz”
    14. Etudes
    15. “Four part playing”
    16. “Four part playing”

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1300 - Concert Choir

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Performance outlet at college level. Repertoire representative of sacred and secular masterpieces in choral literature. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in personal vocal development.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Sing in tune.
    2. Acquire one’s part.
    3. Recognize one’s part within the context of the whole.
    4. Utilize musicianship.
    5. Perform with a musicality consistent with the piece.
    6. Maintain posture and breath support.
    7. Energize the sound.
    8. Communicate the text to the listener.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in musicianship.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Define basic musical terminology and fundamentals, including:
      1. Key signatures.
      2. Time signatures.
      3. Note values.
      4. Pitches.
      5. Rhythms.
      6. Accidentals.
      7. Dynamics.
      8. Tempo indications.
      9. Various Italian terms that give direction in the music.
    2. Recognize the harmonic nature of one’s part.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in musicality.

    Objectives: During the course, students will use:

    1. Style.
    2. Phrasing.
    3. Consistency and continuity.
    4. Emotional communication.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in choral balance.

    Objectives: : During the course, students will:

    1. Exhibit sensitivity to others on the same part.
    2. Exhibit sensitivity to the other parts within the whole.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in foreign language as it applies to singing.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress.
    2. Paraphrase translations to English.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in aesthetic sense as it is applied to performance.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Apply text within the music.
    2. Recognize the value of quality choral literature.
    3. Recognize the value of excellence in performance.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Students will rehearse and perform selected literature. Selections will vary. Rehearsal will include:

    Intonation
    Part
    Musicianship
    Musicality
    Choral tone
    Posture/support
    Focus/energy
    Communication


    Primary Faculty
    Scott, Stuart
    Secondary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1351 - Jazz Lab Band Alto Sax

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern
    jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1352 - Jazz Lab Band Tenor Sax

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1353 - Jazz Lab Band Baritone Sax

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1354 - Jazz Lab Band Trumpet

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1355 - Jazz Lab Band Trombone

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1356 - Jazz Lab Band Electric Bass

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1357 - Jazz Lab Band Drums

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1358 - Jazz Lab Band Guitar

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1359 - Jazz Lab Band Piano

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A jazz ensemble of limited numbers designed for the student with previous instrumental performance experience. Arrangements performed represent various styles in the jazz idiom. May be taken 4 times for credit. A student can earn a maximum of 8 semester hours credit for any combination of MUSC 1300 and MUSC 1351 thru MUSC 1359.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and describe the styles and forms of traditional and modern jazz.

    Objectives: Name, define, and describe the jazz:

    1. Form called “blues”.
    2. Style called “big band”.
    3. Style called “swing”.
    4. Style called “bop”.
    5. Styles called “cool” and “modern jazz”.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to read and perform musical elements used in jazz band arrangement.

    Objectives: Read and perform passages in arrangements:

    1. Using diatonic scales.
    2. Using modes.
    3. Using chords from those scales and modes.
    4. Using rhythms and meters.
    5. Requiring improvisation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Style and Forms of Jazz.
      1. Blues
      2. Big Band
      3. Swing
      4. Bop
      5. Cool and Modern Jazz
    2. Jazz Band Performance Elements
      1. Diatonic Scales
      2. Modes
      3. Chords
      4. Rhythms and Meters
      5. Improvisation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1601 - Introduction to Applied Music Voice

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the vocal performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Dictation and enunciation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. With or without piano accompaniment.
    2. From different style periods.
    3. In foreign languages.
    4. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Management
      2. Vocalize
      3. Posture
      4. Daily Routine
      5. Dictation
      6. Resonance and Quality
    2. Vocal Repertoire
      1. Vocal Literature
      2. Interpretation of Literature
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1602 - Introduction to Applied Music Brasswinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Daily Routine
      5. Tonguing
      6. Focus/Tone
      7. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement Solos
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1603 - Introduction to Applied Music Woodwinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Daily Routine
      5. Tonguing
      6. Focus/Tone
      7. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement Solos
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1604 - Introduction to Applied Music Percussion

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Rhythms and rudiments.
    2. Note reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental understanding of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory understanding of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Rudiments
      2. Hand Positioning
      3. Tone Production
      4. Articulation Styles
    2. Repertoire
      1. Solo Literature
      2. Multi‐Percussion Literature
      3. Chamber Music
      4. Orchestra Literature

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1605 - Introduction to Applied Music Strings

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Hand, finger, and bow positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental understanding of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory understanding of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. With piano accompaniment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Full Smooth Bow
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Articulations (Legato, Staccato)
      5. Left Hand Strength
      6. Tone and Vibrato
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1606 - Introduction to Applied Music Guitar

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the beginning student with the means of establishing proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student will take private lessons on a beginning level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental knowledge of the physical support skills.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Hand and finger positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate fundamental understanding of technical exercises.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate introductory understanding of repertoire.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate introductory knowledge of performance repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Finger Strength
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Daily Routine
      5. Detached, Legato, Staccato
      6. Left Hand Strength
      7. Tone, Vibrato, and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Solo Etudes
      2. Introductory Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1801 - Applied Music Piano

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level of music.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Posture and seating positions.
    2. Hand and finger positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Scales
      2. Posture
      3. Articulation Technique
      4. Touch
      5. Phrasing F. L/R Hand Interdependence
    2. Repertoire
      1. Major Repertoire
      2. Preludes/Fugues
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1802 - Applied Music Organ

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level of music.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate
    performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level repertoire:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In foreign languages.
    3. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Scales
      2. Posture
      3. Articulation Technique
      4. Touch
      5. Phrasing
      6. L/R Hand Interdependence
    2. Repertoire
      1. Major Repertoire
      2. Preludes/Fugues
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1803 - Applied Music Voice

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the major vocal performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level of music.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Dictation and enunciation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level repertoire

    1. With or without piano accompaniment.
    2. From different style periods.
    3. In foreign languages.
    4. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Management
      2. Vocalize
      3. Posture
      4. Dictation
      5. Resonance and Quality
    2. Vocal Repertoire
      1. Vocal Literature
      2. Interpretation of Literature
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1804 - Applied Music Brasswinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform at an intermediate performance level of proficiency

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and perform at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an intermediate performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Tonguing
      5. Focus/Tone
      6. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Vocal Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement Solos
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1805 - Applied Music Woodwinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform music reading at an intermediate performance level of music proficiency.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warm‐up exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Daily Routine
      5. Tonguing
      6. Focus/Tone
      7. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Vocal Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement Solos
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1806 - Applied Music Percussion

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level of music.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Rhythms and rudiments.
    2. Note reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an intermediate performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Rudiments
      2. Hand Positioning
      3. Tone Production
    2. Articulation Styles
    3. Repertoire
      1. Solo Literature
      2. MultiPercussion Literature
      3. Chamber Music
      4. Orchestra Literature

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1807 - Applied Music Strings

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music reading at an intermediate performance level of music fundamentals.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Hand, finger, and bow positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an intermediate performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. With piano accompaniment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate properly.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Full Smooth Bowing
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Articulation (Legato, Staccato)
      5. Left Hand Strength
      6. Tone and Vibrato
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 1808 - Applied Music Classical Guitar

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Private instruction providing the student with the means to increase proficiency in the instrumental performance area. Student must be prepared to begin private lessons on an intermediate level. Contact Music Department at 586.286.2045 or 2046 to make arrangements for private instructor’s name. Student pays for private instruction in addition to tuition payment. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music fundamentals at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an intermediate performance level:

    1. Posture and seating positions.
    2. Hand and finger positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an introductory understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an intermediate performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an intermediate performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. With piano accompaniment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Finger Strengt
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Detached, Legato, Staccato
      5. Left Hand Strength
      6. Tone, Vibrato, and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Solo Etudes
      2. Introductory Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2080 - Theory 3

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1070

    Corequisites: MUSC 2180

    Continuation of theory on the sophomore level. Includes instrumental writing and free voicing, and altered chords (borrowed chords, secondary dominant and leading tone chords, Neapolitan chords, and augmented sixth chords).

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to spell and part‐write typical chromatic chords (e.g. Neapolitan sixth chord, German augmented sixth chord).

    Objective:

    1. Practice part‐writing
    2. Analyze examples of music literature
    3. Perform at the keyboard to demonstrate understanding

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to realize a figured base.

    Objective:

    1. Create a meaningful keyboard composition
    2. Apply chordal technique to linear melody

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    In progress.
    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2180 - Ear Training 3

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1170

    Corequisites: MUSC 2080

    Further development of aural perception on the sophomore level. Study of melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic structures including altered chords, chromatic melodies, unusual meters, and divisions of the beat.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to sing melodies involving all practical intervals, meters and syncopations. He will do this in majorminor, modal or atonal contexts.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and transcribe lengthy melodic structures with some chromaticism.
    2. Sing prepared exercises involving chromaticism, modulation, and atonal elements.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to notate melodic line in diatonic or chromatic exercises.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and transcribe lengthy melodic structures with some chromaticism.
    2. Identify and transcribe all triads and seventh chords as well as simple altered chords in harmonic progression.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to notate all diatonic chords and inversions through the seventh chord as well as simple modulation.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and transcribe lengthy melodic structures with some chromaticism.
    2. Sing prepared exercises involving chromaticism, modulation, and atonal elements.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sight-Singing
      1. Major/minor
      2. Modal/atonal
    2. Melodic Dictation
    3. Harmonic Dictation
      1. Diatonic chords
      2. Inversions
      3. Simple modulation

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2300 - Chamber Choir

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    Corequisites: MUSC 1300 

    An auditioned performance ensemble designed for the advanced choral singer at the college level. Repertoire representative of sacred and secular masterpieces in choral literature from various genres, cultures and historic periods.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in personal vocal development.

    Objectives:

    1. Sing with exemplary placement and focus of tone.
    2. Sing using a free, vibrant and unforced tone.
    3. Sing in tune while exhibiting an outstanding sense of tonal center.
    4. Acquire one’s part through reading musical notation.
    5. Recognize one’s part within the context of the whole.
    6. Utilize musicianship.
    7. Perform with a musicality consistent with the piece.
    8. Maintain posture and breath support.
    9. Communicate the text to the listener.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in musicianship.

    Objectives: 

    1. Define basic musical terminology and fundamentals, including:
      1. Key signatures.
      2. Time signatures.
      3. Note values.
      4. Pitches.
      5. Rhythms.
      6. Accidentals.
      7. Dynamics.
      8. Tempo indications.
      9. Various Italian terms that give direction in the music.
    2. Recognize the harmonic nature of one’s part.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in musicality.

    Objectives: 

    1. Style, appropriate to the piece’s genre, including historical and/or cultural aspects.
    2. Phrasing appropriate to the notation and text creating forward moving musical lines with fitting rise and fall.
    3. Consistency and continuity within one’s performance and from piece to piece.
    4. Emotional communication including facial expression and physical involvement appropriate to the text and style of a piece.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in choral balance.

    Objectives: 

    1. Exhibit sensitivity to others on the same part.
    2. Exhibit sensitivity to the other parts within the whole.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in foreign language as it applies to singing.

    Objectives: 

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress.
    2. Paraphrase translations to English.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in aesthetic sense as it is applied to performance.

    Objectives: 

    1. Apply text within the music.
    2. Recognize the value of quality choral literature.
    3. Recognize the value of excellence in performance.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Chamber Choir is a music opportunity in vocal performance within an auditioned ensemble. Students develop vocal technique, notational reading ability, musicianship and team skills as well as acquire knowledge in music vocabulary and theory. They rehearse and perform selected literature which varies. Rehearsals include:

    1. Vocal Technique
    2. Intonation
    3. Part Acquisition & Recognition
    4. Musicianship
    5. Musicality
    6. Posture/Support/Active Physical Engagement
    7. Focus/Energy/Attentiveness
    8. Diction/language Pronunciation
    9. Communication

    Primary Faculty
    Moses, Todd
    Secondary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2305 - A Cappella Vocal Ensemble

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    Corequisites: MUSC 1300 

    An auditioned performance ensemble of vocalists designed for the advanced singer at the college level. Repertoire representative of pop, jazz and a cappella styles.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in personal a cappella vocal development.

    Objectives: 

    1. Sing with exemplary placement and focus of tone.
    2. Sing using a free, vibrant and unforced tone.
    3. Sing in tune while exhibiting an outstanding sense of tonal center in the a cappella setting.
    4. Acquire one’s part through reading musical notation.
    5. Recognize one’s part within the context of the whole.
    6. Utilize musicianship within the a cappella setting.
    7. Perform with a musicality consistent with the piece.
    8. Maintain posture and breath support.
    9. Communicate the text to the listener.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in a cappella musicianship.

    Objectives: 

    1. Define basic musical terminology and fundamentals, including:
      1. Key signatures.
      2. Time signatures.
      3. Note values.
      4. Pitches.
      5. Rhythms.
      6. Accidentals.
      7. Dynamics.
      8. Tempo indications.
      9. Various Italian terms that give direction in the music.
    2. Recognize the harmonic nature of one’s part within the a cappella setting.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in a cappella musicality.

    Objectives:

    1. Style, appropriate to the piece’s genre, including historical and/or cultural aspects.
    2. Phrasing appropriate to the notation and text creating forward moving musical lines with fitting rise and fall.
    3. Consistency and continuity within one’s performance and from piece to piece.
    4. Emotional communication including facial expression and physical involvement appropriate to the text and style of a piece.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in a cappella ensemble balance.

    Objectives: 

    1. Exhibit sensitivity to others on the same a cappella part.
    2. Exhibit sensitivity to the other a cappella parts within the whole.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in foreign language, nonlexical syllables, or vocal percussive sounds as it applies to a cappella performances.

    Objectives: 

    1. Perform individual sounds, including appropriate pronunciation, execution, intonation or stress.
    2. Paraphrase foreign language text to English translations.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate growth in aesthetic sense as it is applied to an a cappella performance.

    Objectives: 

    1. Apply text within the music.
    2. Recognize the value of quality a cappella literature.
    3. Recognize the value of excellence in an a cappella performance.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The A Cappella Vocal Ensemble is a music opportunity in vocal performance within an auditioned ensemble. Students develop vocal technique, notational reading ability, musicianship and team skills as well as acquire knowledge in music vocabulary and theory. They rehearse and perform various a cappella literature. Rehearsals include:

    1. Vocal Technique
    2. A Cappella Intonation
    3. Part Acquisition & Recognition
    4. Musicianship
    5. Musicality
    6. Posture/Support/Active Physical Engagement
    7. Focus/Energy/Attentiveness
    8. Diction/language Pronunciation
    9. Communication

    Primary Faculty
    Moses, Todd
    Secondary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2710 - Music History & Literature to 1750

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    History and literature of music covering Medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque periods.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able describe Medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque styles.

    Objective:

    1. Listen to examples of concertos, chamber music, symphonies, and sonatas
    2. Explain the differences among these compositions
    3. Express the historical and cultural significance these compositions

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify Medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque composers.

    Objective:

    1. Listen to examples of compositions from various composers within these time periods.
    2. Classify the differences among the composers
    3. Express the social, political, and economic impact of these composers

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicatecompetently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    In progress.
    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2720 - Music History & Literature Since 1750

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    History and literature of music covering Classical, Romantic, and 20th Century periods.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able describe Classical, Romantic, and 20th Century periods.

    Objective:

    1. Listen to examples of concertos, chamber music, symphonies, and sonatas
    2. Explain the differences among these compositions
    3. Express the historical and cultural significance these compositions

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify Classical, Romantic, and 20th Century composers.

    Objective:

    1. Listen to examples of compositions from various composers within these time periods.
    2. Classify the differences among the composers
    3. Express the social, political, and economic impact of these composers

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate properly.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    In progress.
    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2801 - Advanced Applied Music Piano

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1801

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Posture and seating positions.
    2. Hand and finger positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. With piano accompaniment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Scales
      2. Posture
      3. Articulation Technique
      4. Touch
      5. Phrasing
      6. L/R Hand Interdependence
    2. Repertoire
      1. Major Repertoire
      2. Preludes/Fugues
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2802 - Advanced Applied Music Organ

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1802

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In foreign languages.
    3. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Scales
      2. Posture
      3. Articulation Technique
      4. Touch
      5. Phrasing
      6. L/R Hand Interdependence
    2. Repertoire
      1. Major Repertoire
      2. Preludes/Fugues
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2803 - Advanced Applied Music Voice

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1803

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in vocal literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions
    3. Dictation and enunciation

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. With or without piano accompaniment.
    2. From different style periods.
    3. In foreign languages.
    4. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Management
      2. Vocalize
      3. Posture
      4. Dictation
      5. Resonance and Quality
    2. Repertoire
      1. Vocal Literature
      2. Interpretation of Literature
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2804 - Advanced Applied Music Brasswinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1804

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Tonguing
      5. Focus/Tone
      6. Focus/Tone F. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement Solos
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2805 - Advanced Applied Music Woodwinds

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1805

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Breath support.
    2. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    3. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Breath Support
      2. Flexibility, Long Tones, Arpeggios, Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Tonguing
      5. Focus/Tone
      6. Tone, Vibrato and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes, Study and One Movement
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2806 - Advanced Applied Music Percussion

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1806

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Finger touch, hand strength, hand balance, and hand independence.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    I. Physical Skills A. Rudiments B. Hand Positioning C. Tone Production D. Articulation Styles

    1. Physical Skills
      1. Rudiments
      2. Hand Positioning
      3. Tone Production
      4. Articulation Styles
    2. Repertoire
      1. Solo Literature
      2. Multi-Percussion Literature
      3. Chamber Music
      4. Orchestra Literature

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2807 - Advanced Applied Music Strings

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1807

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Hand, finger, and bow positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Full Smooth Bowing
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Articulation (Legato, Staccato)
      5. Left Hand Strength
      6. Tone and Vibrato
    2. Repertoire
      1. Etudes
      2. Major Repertoire
      3. Stage Etiquette and Stage Presence
      4. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • MUSC 2808 - Advanced Applied Music Classical Guitar

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: MUSC 1808

    Private instruction at an advanced level allowing the student to study and be coached in instrumental literature and prepare for concert or recital presentation. Participation in recital presentation required. May be taken 4 times for credit.

    Contact Hours: 0.5
    Billable Contact Hours: 1
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate music at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Note reading.
    2. Rhythmic reading.
    3. Phrasing.
    4. Tempo and dynamics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate physical support skills at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate at an advanced performance level:

    1. Posture, standing, and seating positions.
    2. Hand and finger positions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate technical exercises at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and demonstrate an advanced understanding of:

    1. Warmup exercises for flexibility.
    2. Exercises for tone development.
    3. Articulation and tempo exercises for technical control.
    4. Scales and arpeggios for technical control.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name, define, and demonstrate repertoire at an advanced performance level.

    Objectives: Name, define, and play repertoire at an advanced performance level:

    1. From different style periods.
    2. In both popular and classical styles.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Physical Skills
      1. Finger Strength
      2. Scales
      3. Posture
      4. Detached, Legato, Staccato
      5. Left Hand Strength
      6. Tone, Vibrato, and Maturity
    2. Repertoire
      1. Solo Etudes
      2. Introductory Repertoire
      3. Recital Performance and Jury

    Primary Faculty
    Cook, Thomas
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Nursing

  
  • NURS 1145 - Health Assessment in Nursing

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; BIOL 2400 or BIOL 2730; BIOL 1400, BIOL 2710, and HHSC 1040 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1155, NURS 1165, and NURS 1175

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1510)

    This theory course presents a general overview of the health assessment process in nursing. Topics include evidence-based, patient-centered adult physical assessment techniques, critical thinking skills in identifying assessment norms and variances, lifespan and cultural/gender variations, communication techniques in collecting subjective data systematically, and components of a sexual assessment as it relates to sexuality throughout the lifespan.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

     

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1.  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define evidence‐based practice and describe examples that apply to the health assessment of selected patients.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will define and describe evidence‐based practice associated with health assessment of the adult patient.
    2. The student will define and describe the skills and techniques required to complete a health assessment of the adult patient.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
     

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify how nursing and other health professions are part of a system that affects patient and family outcomes.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will describe the roles of health professionals in the assessment process.
    2. The student will recognize how efficient, accurate nursing assessment impacts quality care of the patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Physical Assessment
      1. Organization of data
      2. Medical vs. nursing models
      3. Inspection
      4. Palpation
      5. Percussion
      6. Auscultation
      7. Equipment
    2. Review of the Assessment Process
      1. Purpose
      2. Comparison of nursing and medical assessments; principles of caring
      3. Database
      4. Data sources
      5. Equipment
      6. Communication techniques
      7. Life‐span and cultural considerations
    3. Assessing the Skin, Hair, and Nails
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    4. Assessing the GI System
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    5. Assessing the Respiratory System
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    6. Assessing the Cardiovascular System
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    7. Assessing the Head, Neck, and Thyroid
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    8. Assessing the Musculoskeletal System
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    9. Assessing the Neurological System
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    10. Assessing the Reproductive System/Breast Examination
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
    11. Assessing/Instructing Patients in Health Promotion Strategies
      1. Nursing diagnoses
    12. Assessment of Sexuality
      1. Components of sexual history
      2. Sexuality throughout the life span
      3. Factors affecting sexuality

    Primary Faculty
    Sikorski, Catherine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1155 - Fundamentals of Nursing Practice 1

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; BIOL 2400 or BIOL 2730; BIOL 1400, BIOL 2710, and HHSC 1040 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1145, NURS 1165, and NURS 1175

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1520)

    This theory course focuses on developing the critical thinking skills of the nursing process. It introduces communication and interviewing techniques for data collection, examines the nursing implications for diagnostic studies while planning nursing care, and introduces infectious disease principles. In addition, the course addresses pharmacologic principles and safe medication administration.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define evidence‐based practice and describe examples that apply to the adult patient population.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will identify and begin to apply evidence‐based practice in the communication process.
    2. The student will identify and begin to apply evidence‐based practice in nursing process.
    3. The student will identify and begin to apply evidence‐based practice related to diagnostic testing.
    4. The student will identify and begin to apply evidence‐based practice with infectious diseases.
    5. The student will identify and begin to apply evidence‐based practice with pharmacologic principles and medication administration.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify how nursing quality improvement strategies affect patient and family outcomes.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies when applying the nursing process.
    2. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies while communicating with patients, families, and healthcare team members.
    3. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies while obtaining health history data.
    4. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies while preparing and analyzing diagnostic testing.
    5. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies for the patient with an infectious disease process.
    6. The student will identify quality improvement/nursing strategies while preparing to administer medications in a safe manner.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Infectious Disease
      1. Organism
      2. Culture/sensitivity
      3. Antibiotic use
      4. Evidence‐based practice
    2. Introduction to Diagnostic Testing
      1. Laboratory tests
      2. Radiographic tests
      3. Endoscopic procedures
      4. Nursing implications
      5. Evidence‐based practice
    3. Nursing Process
      1. Assessment
      2. Analysis/planning
      3. Nursing diagnosis
      4. Intervention
      5. Evaluation
    4. Evidence‐Based Practice
    5. Health History
      1. Process
      2. Data
      3. Organization
    6. Communication
      1. Methods of communication
      2. Verbal/nonverbal techniques
      3. Therapeutic techniques
      4. Non‐therapeutic techniques
      5. Social vs therapeutic relationships
      6. Life span considerations
      7. Cultural considerations
      8. Evidence‐based practice
    7. Pharmacological Principles
      1. Application of basic medication principles
      2. Pharmacokenitics
      3. Pharmacodynamics
      4. Pharmacotherapeutics
      5. Adverse drug reaction
      6. Factors affecting drug absorption
    8. Medication Administration
      1. Medication orders
      2. Five rights of medication administration
      3. Medication errors
      4. Preventing medication errors
      5. Evidence‐based practice

    Primary Faculty
    Malak, Bonita
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1165 - Introduction to Clinical Nursing Skills

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; BIOL 2400 or BIOL 2730; BIOL 1400, BIOL 2710, and HHSC 1040 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1145, NURS 1155, and NURS 1175

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1530)

    This course focuses on skills needed to provide and manage safe nursing care of adult patients. The student will practice critical thinking and communication skills in order to safely care for adults of various ages. Major emphasis will be on developing psychomotor skills related to vital signs, personal hygiene, asepsis, transfer and ambulation, hydration, elimination, intake/output, ostomies, wound care, comfort measures, and administration of medications. The course also introduces documentation of procedures and nursing care, including the use of basic technology within the healthcare setting. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    3. Demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the problem solving and decision strategies necessary to use the nursing process while caring for general adult patients

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will identify drug actions and nursing interventions appropriate to administering medications in the laboratory practice setting.
    2. The student will correctly compute drug calculations in the laboratory practice setting.
    3. The student will perform basic nursing interventions safely in the laboratory and hospital settings.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    4. Communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and begin to demonstrate therapeutic communication techniques in the laboratory setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document care accurately and consistently.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and the responsible registered nurse.
    3. The student will therapeutically communicate and demonstrate appropriate nonverbal behavior.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    5. Demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    3. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and begin to demonstrate the role of the professional nurse in the simulated clinical setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    6. Utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    4. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate use of basic technology within the laboratory setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will perform nursing interventions safely in the laboratory setting.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant adult patient data, including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

     


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orientation Providing Environmental Safety
      1. Medical asepsis
      2. Universal Precautions
      3. Isolation techniques
      4. Body mechanics
      5. Transferring and ambulation
      6. Applying restraints
    2. Application of the Nursing Process to Assessing Vital Signs
      1. Temperature, pulse, respiration
      2. Blood pressure
      3. Pulse oximetry
    3. Application of the Nursing Process to Patient Hygiene
      1. Bathing
      2. Oral care
      3. Perineal care
      4. Anti‐embolic hose
      5. ROM
      6. Bed making
      7. Assisting with bedpan/urinal
      8. Positioning
    4. Application of the Nursing Process to Wound Care
      1. Non sterile
      2. Wet to dry
      3. Packing
      4. Assessment
    5. Application of the Nursing Process to Patient Elimination
      1. Intake/output
      2. Specimen collection
      3. Sterile gloving
      4. Catheterization
      5. Enema
      6. Ostomy care
    6. Application of the Nursing Process to Patient Health History Interview
      1. Interview
      2. Documentation
    7. Application of the Nursing Process to Patient Developing Communication Skills
      1. Communication Techniques
      2. Blocks to communication
      3. Relating to patients from different cultures
      4. Relating to patients with altered sensory perception
    8. Clinical Experience at Community Agency
      1. Introduction to long‐term care or clinical facility
      2. Vital signs
    9. Medication Preparation and Administration
      1. Oral
      2. Intramuscular, subcutaneous, intradermal
      3. Other methods of medication administration
      4. Medication charting

    Primary Faculty
    Malak, Bonita
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1175 - Health Assessment Skills in Nursing

    Credit Hours: 0.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; BIOL 2400 or BIOL 2730; BIOL 1400, BIOL 2710, and HHSC 1040 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1145, NURS 1155, and NURS 1165

    In this laboratory course students will identify, practice, and demonstrate physical examination and data collection skills as a framework for learning to provide and manage safe, competent care to culturally diverse adult patients. Students will utilize critical thinking and communication skills while employing evidence-based practice as it relates to assessment. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can identify and describe the problem solving and decision strategies necessary to use the nursing process while assessing healthy adults in the laboratory setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in assessment/data collection (i.e., labs, diagnostics, medications, etc).
    2. The student will perform nursing interventions safely, in a timely manner.
    3. The student will provide care with sensitivity and respect for human diversity.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can identify and begin to demonstrate therapeutic communication while performing a health assessment.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document accurately, completely and consistently on all patient records and assignments.
    2. The student will communicate therapeutically with the patient and family.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can define and begin to demonstrate the role of the professional nurse while performing a health assessment in the laboratory setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.
    5. The student will recognize own limitations, seek assistance from faculty/staff, and assume responsibility for own learning and professional growth.
    6. The student will be receptive to and use constructive feedback to improve performance.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    1.  The student can demonstrate use of basic technology while performing a health assessment within the laboratory setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will use patient care equipment safely.
    2. The student will use technology to obtain and record relevant patient data including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Health History Interview, Techniques and Equipment
      1. Data collection
      2. Inspection
      3. Palpation
      4. Auscultation
      5. Percussion
    2. Abdominal/Gastrointestinal and Male Reproductive Assessment
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
      3. Documentation
    3. Lung and Respiratory Assessment
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
      3. Documentation
    4. Heart/Peripheral Vascular and Breast/Axillae Assessment
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
      3. Documentation
    5. Musculoskeletal and Neurologic Assessment
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
      3. Documentation
    6. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose & Throat Assessment
      1. Subjective data
      2. Objective data
      3. Documentation

    Primary Faculty
    DeBoer, Karen
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1245 - Fundamentals of Nursing Practice 2A

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1145, NURS 1155, NURS 1165, NURS 1175, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 1265

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1610)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care to patients experiencing problems related to wounds, fluid and electrolyte balance, pain, oxygenation, and diabetes mellitus. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families. In addition, the course addresses growth and development of middle adulthood and nursing documentation in the medical record.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define evidence‐based practice and describe examples that apply to patients with physiologic nursing problems.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to wounds.
    2. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to fluid and electrolyte balance
    3. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to pain.
    4. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to oxygenation.
    5. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to diabetes mellitus.
    6. The student will describe the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to middle adulthood.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients with physiologic nursing problems.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will identify quality indicators for patients with problems related to wounds, pain, and diabetes mellitus.
    2. The student will recall regulatory standards and legal and ethical principles that affect nursing documentation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Wounds
      1. Reactions of the body to trauma
      2. Factors affecting wound healing
      3. Pressure ulcers
      4. Wound assessment
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
      7. Quality standards
        1. Assessment
        2. Staging
        3. Documentation
    2. Fluid/Electrolyte Balance
      1. Factors affecting fluid and electrolyte balance
      2. Fluid volume excess
      3. Fluid volume deficit
      4. Electrolyte imbalances
      5. Subjective findings
      6. Objective findings
      7. Nursing diagnosis
      8. Nursing interventions
    3. Pain
      1. Physiological and emotional aspects of pain
      2. Cultural influences
      3. Chronic vs. acute pain
      4. Pain assessment
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Non‐pharmacologic interventions
      7. Pharmacologic interventions
        1. Opioids
        2. NSAIDS
      8. Quality standards
        1. Rating scales
        2. Goal setting
        3. Assessment/reassessment
    4. Oxygenation
      1. Factors affecting respiration
      2. Assessing oxygenation
      3. Promoting oxygenation
      4. Oxygen delivery systems/oxygen therapy
      5. Tracheotomy
      6. Medications
        1. Cough
        2. Inhalers
        3. Antihistamines
    5. Diabetes Mellitus
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Clinical manifestations
      3. Nursing diagnosis
      4. Nursing interventions
      5. Pharmacologic interventions
        1. Insulin
        2. Oral agents
      6. Quality standards of care
    6. Middle Adulthood
      1. Biologic development
      2. Psychosocial development
      3. Developmental issues
    7. Documentation
      1. Purposes
      2. Types
      3. Methods/rules
      4. Legal and ethical principles
      5. Regulatory requirements
      6. Acceptable abbreviations

    Primary Faculty
    Courtemanche, Edward
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1255 - Fundamentals of Nursing Practice 2B

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1245 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1265

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1620)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing sleep, vision, hearing, immobility, and end of life care problems. The course presents an introduction to cancer as well as the concept of spirituality as utilized in patient-centered care. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families and addresses growth and development of older adults.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define evidence‐based practice and describe examples that apply to patient populations with problems related to the senses and end of life issues.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will describe nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to sleep.
    2. The student will describe nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to vision.
    3. The student will describe nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to hearing.
    4. The student will describe nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing problems related to immobility.
    5. The student will describe nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients at the end of life.
    6. The student will describe spirituality as a concept utilized in the provision of nursing care.
    7. The student will define basic terminology, risk factors, and nursing and medical interventions related to cancer patients.
    8. The student will describe physiological, psychosocial, and developmental concerns of the older adult population.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for older adult patients.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will identify the interdisciplinary role of nursing in the care of patients with problems related to immobility, sleep, vision and hearing, cancer, end of life, spirituality, and older adulthood.
    2. The student will identify the role of spirituality in the provision of patient‐centered nursing care.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Immobility
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Effects of immobility on all body systems
      3. Nursing diagnosis related to immobility
      4. Nursing interventions
      5. Evaluation of care
    2. Sleep
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Process/physiology
      3. Fitness
      4. Disorders
      5. Nursing strategies to promote sleep
      6. Non drug therapy
      7. Pharmacologic therapy used for sleep
        1. Hypnotics
        2. Benzodiazepines and like drugs
        3. Antidepressants
        4. Antihistamines
        5. Alternative medicines
    3. Vision
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Medical and surgical management for patients with problems related to:
        1. Cataracts
        2. Glaucoma
        3. Retinal detachment
        4. Macular degeneration
        5. Corneal disorders
        6. Safety issues
      3. Nursing care for patients with problems related to:
        1. Cataracts
        2. Glaucoma
        3. Retinal detachment
        4. Macular degeneration
        5. Corneal disorders
        6. EBP
    4. Hearing
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Medical and surgical management for patients with problems related to:
        1. Hearing loss
        2. Meniere’s Disease
      3. Nursing care for patients with problems related to:
        1. Hearing loss
        2. Meniere’s Disease
        3. EBP
    5. Cancer
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Benign and malignant tumors
      3. Carcinogens
      4. Risk factors
      5. Cell characteristics
      6. Metastatic staging
      7. Warning signs
      8. Introduction to nursing and medical interventions
      9. Survivorship
      10. Evidence-based practice (EBP)
    6. End of Life
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Advance directives/palliative care
      3. Signs of impending death
      4. Pharmacologic care for end of life issues
        1. Types of pain
        2. Common clinical problems
        3. Adjuvants
        4. Non‐pharmacological interventions
      5. Ethics
      6. After death care
        1. Postmortem care
        2. Supportive care
      7. EBP
    7. Spirituality
      1. Concept
      2. Joint commission recommendations
      3. Collaborative care
      4. EBP
    8. Older Adulthood
      1. Medical terminology
      2. Physiological integrity
      3. Psychosocial integrity
      4. Developmental issues
      5. Risk factors and safety standards
      6. EBP
    9. Integrated Pharmacology Content
      1. Narcotics and Adjuvants for Pain and Comfort at End of Life
        1. Opioids
        2. Laxatives
        3. Anti-emetics
        4. Anticholinergic
        5. Appetite stimulants
      2. Opthalmic drugs
        1. antibiotics
        2. antiglaucoma agents
      3. Sleep aids

    Primary Faculty
    Tuoriniemi, Pamela
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1265 - Introduction to Clinical Nursing Practice

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1145, NURS 1155, NURS 1165, NURS 1175, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS1245 and NURS 1255

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1630)

    This patient-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing care. Utilizing the nursing process, students will develop critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for adult patients. This clinical course will focus on documentation, medication administration, and health assessment of the hospitalized patient. New skills emphasized during this rotation include nursing care of patients requiring gastric feedings, tracheotomy care, respiratory suctioning, and respiratory adjunct oxygen implementation. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 9 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    3. Demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the problem solving and decision strategies necessary to use the nursing process while caring for general adult patients in the hospital setting

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in physical assessment with adults in the general hospital setting.
    2. The student will identify drug actions and nursing interventions appropriate to administering medications to adult patients in the general hospital setting.
    3. The student will correctly compute and administer drugs to adults in the general hospital setting.
    4. The student will perform basic nursing interventions safely while caring for adults in the general hospital setting.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    4. Communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and begin to demonstrate therapeutic communication techniques in the hospital setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document care accurately and consistently while caring for adult patients in the hospital setting.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and the responsible registered nurse.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    5. Demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    3. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and begin to demonstrate the role of the professional nurse in the hospital clinical setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    6. Utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    4. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate use of basic technology within the healthcare setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will perform nursing interventions safely while caring for adults in the general hospital setting.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant adult patient data, including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Nursing Care related to Oxygenation
      1. Oxygen delivery devices
        1. Nasal cannula
        2. Masks
        3. Tracheostomy care
      2. Promoting oxygenation
        1. Metered dosed inhalers
        2. Nebulizers
        3. Suctioning
        4. Chest physiotherapy
    2. Nursing Care related to Gastrointestinal Care
      1. PEG care
        1. Nutrition
        2. Medication administration
        3. Patent tube
      2. PEJ
        1. Nutrition
        2. Medication administration
        3. Patent tube
      3. Feeding tube
        1. Nutrition
        2. Medication administration
        3. Patent tube
    3. Health Assessment of the Hospitalized Adult Patients
      1. Health history and physical exam
      2. Application of nursing process
    4. Application of the Nursing Process to Patient Care
      1. Safe medication administration
        1. Nonparenteral: oral, ototic, ophthalmic, topical
        2. Parenteral: intramuscular, subcutaneous, intradermal
        3. Dosage calculations
        4. Comprehensive health assessment
      2. Nursing interventions to promote health physiologic responses

    Primary Faculty
    Sikorski, Catherine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1345 - Introduction to Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing A

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1255 and NURS 1265 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 1365

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1710)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care to patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for culturally-diverse patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the role of evidence in determining best clinical practice and differentiate clinical opinion from research and evidence summaries for patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will explain subjective and objective data of patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.
    2. The student will identify data to select appropriate nursing diagnosis and collaborative problems of patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.
    3. The student will recall evidence‐based collaborative management for the patient experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.
    4. The student will explain evidence‐based nursing interventions for patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
     

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients experiencing surgical interventions, gastrointestinal problems, and nutritional problems.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will recognize quality indicators related to perforated appendix rates.
    2. The student will state national patient safety goals involved in preventing wrong site surgery.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Nutritional Assessment
      1. Guidelines
      2. Influencing affecting factors
      3. Cultural, age, gender variations
      4. Diagnosis
      5. Interventions
      6. Evaluation
    2.  Perioperative Nursing
      1. Perioperative period
        1. Surgical setings
        2. Classifications
        3. Surgical risks
        4. Surgical terminology
        5. Physiological stress response to surgery
        6. Changes of aging related to surgery
        7. Psychosocial considerations
        8. Preoperative nursing assessment
          1. Subjective data
          2. Objective data
        9. Preoperative nursing interventions
          1. Preoperative teaching
            1. Physical preparation
            2. Postop care preparation
          2. Preoperative/operative medication
            1. Sedatives/hypnotics
            2. Tranquilizers (benzodiazepines)
            3. Narcotic analgesics
            4. Anticholinergics
            5. Antianxiolytics
            6. Prophylactic antibiotics
            7. Antiemetics
          3. Operative permit
            1. Informed consent
            2. Witness signature
          4. Preoperative checklist
      2. Intraoperative period
        1. Physical environment
          1. Holding area
          2. Operating room
        2. Roles of members of surgical team
          1. Surgeon
          2. Anesthesiologist/anesthetist
          3. Circulation nurse
          4. Scrub nurse/tech
        3. Management of the patient in the OR
        4. Anesthesia
          1. Definition
          2. Types
            1. General
              1. Intravenous agents
              2. Inhalation agents
            2. Regional
              1. Spina
              2. Epidural
          3. Stages of anesthesia
          4. Anesthesia Adjuncts
            1. Neuromuscular blocking agents
            2. Narcotics
            3. Tranquilizers
            4. Antiemetics
            5. Anticholinergics
            6. Neuromuscular reversing agents
        5. Intraoperative complications
      3. Immediate postoperative period (PACU)
        1. Initial assessment and related interventions
        2. Criteria for discharge from the PACU
      4. Care for the post‐op patient on the nursing unit
        1. Continued assessment and interventions
        2. Postoperative pain management
        3. Potential complications and related interventions in the post‐op patient
        4. Discharge teaching
    3. Ingestion/Esophageal Disorders
      1. Pathophysiology of:
        1. Dental disorders
        2. Periodontal disease
        3. Oral disorders
        4. Benign tumors of the oral cavity
        5. Premalignant tumors of the oral cavity
        6. Malignant tumors of the oral cavity
        7. Disorders of the salivary glands
        8. Achalasia
        9. Diffuse esophageal spasm
        10. Gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD)
        11. Hiatel hernia
        12. Diverticula
        13. Esophageal neoplasms
      2. Subjective findings
      3. Objective findings
      4. Medical/surgical management
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
    4. Gastric Disorders
      1. Pathophysiology of:
        1. Acute gastritis
        2. Chronic gastritis
        3. Peptic ulcer disease
        4. Gastric ulcer
      2. Subjective findings
      3. Objective findings
      4. Medical/surgical management
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
    5. Gall Bladder/Pancreas Disorders
      1. Pathophysiology of:
        1. Cholelithiasis
        2. Acute cholecystitis
        3. Acute acalculous cholecystitis
        4. Chronic cholecystitis
        5. Choledocholithiasis/cholangitis
        6. Carcinoma of the gall bladder
        7. Acute pancreatitis
        8. Chronic pancreatitis
      2. Subjective findings
      3. Objective findings
      4. Medical/surgical management
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
    6. Liver Disorders
      1. Pathophysiology of:
        1. Hemolytic jaundice
        2. Hepatocellular jaundice
        3. Obstructive jaundice
        4. Viral hepatitis
        5. Toxic hepatitis
        6. Alcoholic hepatitis
        7. Laennec’s cirrhosis
        8. Postnecrotic cirrhosis
        9. Biliary cirrhosis
        10. Portal hypertension
        11. Ascites
        12. Hepatic encephalopathy
        13. Fatty liver
        14. Liver neoplasms
      2. Subjective findings
      3. Objective findings
      4. Medical/surgical management
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
    7. Intestinal Disorders
      1. Pathophysiology of:
        1. Bowel infections/infestations
        2. Appendicitis
        3. Peritonitis
        4. Crohn’s disease
        5. Ulcerative colitis
        6. Benign bowel tumors
        7. Cancer of the small bowel
        8. Colon cancer
        9. Herniations
        10. Diverticular disease
        11. Obstruction
        12. Irritable bowel syndrome
        13. Acquired megacolon
        14. Hemorrhoids
        15. Pilonidal cyst
        16. Anal fissure
        17. Anal fistula
        18. Anorectal abscess
        19. Anorectal tumor
      2. Subjective findings
      3. Objective findings
      4. Medical/surgical management
      5. Nursing diagnosis
      6. Nursing interventions
    8. Pharmacology Categories: Integrated Throughout the Course with Appropriate Content
      1. Antacids/antiflatulents
      2. Antidiarrheals
      3. Laxatives
      4. Antiemetics
      5. Intravenous therapy
      6. Nutritional therapy
      7. Sedatives/hypnotics
      8. Tranquilizers (benzodiazepines)
      9. Narcotic analgesics
      10. Anticholinergics
      11. Antianxiolytics
      12. Prophylactic antibiotics
      13. Neuromuscular blocking agents
      14. Neuromuscular reversing agents

    Primary Faculty
    Courtemanche, Edward
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1355 - Introduction to Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing B

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1345 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1365

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1720)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care to patients experiencing problems related to acid-base balance, the respiratory system, and diabetes. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for culturally-diverse patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the role of evidence in determining best clinical practice and differentiate clinical opinion from research and evidence summaries for patients with acid‐base disturbances, respiratory disorders, and diabetes.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will interpret subjective and objective data for patients with acid‐base disturbances, respiratory disorders, and diabetes.
    2. The student will interpret data to select appropriate nursing diagnosis and collaborative problems.
    3. The student will describe evidence‐based collaborative management for the patient with acid‐base disturbances, respiratory disorders, and diabetes.
    4. The student will select evidence‐based nursing interventions for patients with acid‐base disturbances, respiratory disorders, and diabetes.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

     2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients with acid‐base disturbances, respiratory disorders, and diabetes.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will recognize quality indicators for patients with bacterial pneumonia.
    2. The student will define quality indicators for patients with adult asthma.
    3. The student will explain quality indicators for the patient with COPD.
    4. The student will state national patient safety goals to prevent ventilator‐acquired pneumonia.
    5. The student will explain national patient safety goals to prevent injury in patients receiving anticoagulation therapy.
    6. The student will explain quality indicators in the collaborative management of the patient with diabetes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT 1 ‐ RESPIRATORY DISORDERS

    1. Assessment of the Respiratory System
      1. Anatomy & physiology overview
      2. Assessment techniques
        1. History
        2. Physical and psychosocial assessment
        3. Diagnostic assessment
      3. Changes in the respiratory system related to aging
    2. Interventions for Patients requiring Oxygen or Tracheostomy
      1. Oxygen therapy
        1. Complications
        2. Deficiency systems
        3. Home care management
        4. Evidence‐based practice for patient requiring oxygen
      2. Tracheostomy
        1. Pre‐ and post‐op care
        2. Complications
        3. Trache tubes
        4. Trache care
        5. Evidence‐based practice for patients requiring suctioning
        6. Best practices for patients with tracheostomy
        7. Best practices to prevent aspiration
    3. Interventions for Patients with Noninfectious Upper Respiratory Problems
      1. Disorders of nose and sinuses
        1. Fractures
        2. Epistaxis
        3. Cancers
        4. Trauma
      2. Disorders of pharynx
        1. Obstructive sleep apnea
        2. Management
          1. Assessment
          2. Interventions
            1. Non‐surgical
            2. Surgical
      3. Disorders of the larynx
        1. Vocal cord paralysis, nodules, and polyps
        2. Laryngeal trauma
      4. Upper airway obstruction and neck trauma
      5. Head and neck cancer
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Assessment
        3. Interventions
          1. Non‐surgical
          2. Laryngectomy
        4. Pre‐ and post‐op care
        5. Speech rehab
        6. Home care
        7. Best practices to prevent aspiration
    4. Interventions for Patients with Noninfectious Lower Respiratory Problems
      1. Chronic airflow limitations (asthma, emphysema, bronchitis)
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Etiology
        3. Collaborative management
          1. Physical and psychosocial assessment
          2. Diagnostic assessment
          3. Nursing diagnosis
          4. Pharmacologic interventions
            1. Bronchodilators
            2. Steroids
            3. Expectorants
            4. Mucolytics
          5. Nursing management
        4. Quality indicators for asthma, COPD
      2. Pulmonary hypertension
      3. Interstitial pulmonary diseases
        1. Sarcoidosis
        2. Pulmonary fibrosis
      4. Occupational pulmonary diseases
      5. Lung cancer
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Etiology
        3. Collaborative management
          1. Physical and psychosocial assessment
          2. Diagnostic assessment
          3. Operative procedures
          4. Post‐op care including chest tube management
          5. Palliative care
    5. Interventions for Patients with Infectious Respiratory Problems
      1. Disorders of the nose and sinuses
        1. Rhinitis and sinusitis
          1. Assessment
          2. Interventions
          3. Drug therapy
            1. Antihistamines
            2. Decongestants
          4. Surgical interventions
      2. Disorders of pharynx and tonsils
        1. Pharyngitis and tonsillitis
          1. Assessment
          2. Interventions
        2. Tonsillectomy
      3. Disorders of the larynx and lungs
        1. Laryngitis, influenza, pneumonia, and TB
          1. Overview
          2. Pathophysiology
          3. Etiology
          4. Management
            1. Assessment
            2. Diagnostics
            3. Interventions
          5. Drug therapy
            1. Antibiotics (penicillins, cephalosporins, tetracyclines, aminoglycosides, macrolides, vancomycin)
            2. Antitubercular
          6. Health teaching
          7. Patient safety goals related to pneumonia/vent‐acquired pneumonia
        2. Other influenzas (avian flu, swine flu)
      4. Emphysema, abscesses
        1. Assessment
        2. Interventions
      5. Inhalation anthrax
    6. Interventions for Critically Ill Patients with Respiratory Problems
      1. Pulmonary embolism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Etiology
        3. Management
          1. Assessment
          2. Diagnostics
        4. Non‐surgical interventions
          1. Oxygen therapy
          2. Anticoagulation therapy
            1. Heparin
            2. Coumadin
        5. Surgical interventions
        6. Health teaching
        7. Patient safety goals for patients receiving anticoagulation therapy
      2. Acute respiratory failure
      3. Acute respiratory distress syndrome
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Etiology
        3. Management
          1. Assessment
          2. Interventions
            1. Drugs
            2. Oxygenation
      4. Intubation and mechanical ventilation
        1. Types of ventilators
        2. Modes
        3. Weaning
        4. Best practice to secure endotracheal tubes
        5. Best practices for patients requiring mechanical ventilation
      5. Chest trauma: rib fracture, flail chest, pneumothorax
        1. Overview
        2. Collaborative management

    UNIT 2 ‐ DIABETES MANAGEMENT

    1. Review of Diabetes
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Diagnostics
    2. Nutritional Interventions
    3. Blood Glucose Monitoring
    4. Exercise Therapy
    5. Foot Care
    6. Drug Therapy
      1. Oral agents
      2. Insulin therapy
        1. Complications
        2. Alternative methods
      3. Newer drugs
    7. Quality Indicators for the Diabetic Patient

    UNIT 3 ‐ ACID‐BASE DISORDERS

    1. Introduction to Acid‐Base Balance
      1. Acid‐base chemistry
        1. Acids
        2. Bases
        3. Buffers
      2. Body fluid chemistry
      3. Acid‐base regulatory mechanisms
        1. Chemical
        2. Respiratory
        3. Renal
        4. Compensation
      4. Age related changes in acid‐base balance
    2. Assessment of Acid‐Base Balance
      1. History
      2. Physical assessment
      3. Diagnostics
    3. Interventions for Patients with Acid‐Base Imbalances
      1. Acidosis
        1. Metabolic
        2. Respiratory
        3. Combined
      2. Alkalosis
        1. Metabolic
        2. Respiratory
      3. Causes of metabolic and respiratory imbalances
      4. Assessment findings in metabolic and respiratory imbalances
    4. Analysis of Arterial Blood Gases

    Primary Faculty
    Courtemanche, Edward
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1365 - Introduction to Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing Clinical

    Credit Hours: 2.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1255 and NURS 1265 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 1345 and NURS 1355

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 1730)

    This patient-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing care for adult patients. Utilizing the nursing process, the student will develop critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for adult patients with surgery, acid-base imbalance, diabetes mellitus, and respiratory and gastrointestinal problems. New skills emphasized during this rotation include NG tubes, chest tubes, IV/IVPB, and blood and blood product transfusions. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 15 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 5.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    3. Demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate effective use of the nursing process while caring for patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in physical assessment with adult patients.
    2. The student will identify drug actions and nursing interventions appropriate to the medications for patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.
    3. The student will correctly compute and administer drugs to patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.
    4. The student will perform nursing interventions safely with patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    4. Communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate therapeutic communication techniques, including teaching, for the patient and family experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will document care accurately and consistently.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and RN.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    5. Demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    3. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate qualities and behaviors of the professional nurse while caring for patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    6. Utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    4. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate use of available technology within the healthcare setting while caring for patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems, including nursing care and patient response.

    Course Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will perform nursing interventions safely with patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant data for patients experiencing surgery, acid‐base imbalance, respiratory problems, diabetes mellitus, and gastrointestinal problems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Perioperative Nursing Care
      1. Assessment and care of:
        1. Preoperative patients
        2. Intraoperative patients
        3. Postoperative patients
      2. Perioperative teaching
        1. Comfort/safety measures
        2. Medications/routes of administration
          1. Narcotics, antianxiolytics, anticholinergics
          2. PCA
          3. Epidural/spinal anesthesia
          4. Sedatives/hypnotics
          5. Anesthetic agents
      3. Postoperative nursing interventions
    2. Nursing Care for Patients with Acid‐Base Imbalances
      1. Assessment
      2. Regulation
      3. Laboratory tests
      4. Interventions
    3. Nursing Care for Patients Experiencing Respiratory Problems
      1. Lung assessment
      2. Nursing diagnoses (respiratory)
      3. Clinical manifestations
      4. Nursing interventions
      5. Analysis of diagnostic tests
      6. Pharmacological management of respiratory disorders
    4. Nursing Care for Patients with Gastrointestinal Problems
      1. Neoplastic disorders
      2. Ingestion/esophagus disorders
        1. Subjective findings
        2. Objective findings
        3. Medical/surgical management
        4. Nursing diagnosis
        5. Nursing interventions
      3. Gastric disorders
        1. Subjective findings
        2. Objective findings
        3. Medical/surgical management
        4. Nursing diagnosis
        5. Nursing interventions
      4. Gall bladder/pancreas disorders
        1. Subjective findings
        2. Objective findings
        3. Medical/surgical management
        4. Nursing diagnosis
        5. Nursing interventions
      5. Liver disorders
        1. Subjective findings
        2. Objective findings
        3. Medical/surgical management
        4. Nursing diagnosis
        5. Nursing interventions
      6. Intestinal disorders
        1. Subjective findings
        2. Objective findings
        3. Medical/surgical management
        4. Nursing diagnosis
        5. Nursing interventions
      7. Pharmacological management of gastrointestinal problems
      8. Blood/blood product transfusion
        1. Nursing interventions
      9. Skills/equipment
        1. IV/IVPB
        2. NG tubes
        3. Chest tubes
    5. Diabetes Mellitus
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Oral agents
      3. Insulin
      4. Acute care management

    Primary Faculty
    Courtemanche, Edward
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1446 - Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing A

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1355 and NURS 1365 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 1475

    (replaces NURS 1445)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing problems related to anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families. In addition, the course addresses growth and development of adolescent and young adult patients.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can explain the role of evidence in determining best clinical practice and differentiate clinical opinion from research and evidence summaries for patients experiencing anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will explain the role of evidence in the nursing care of culturally-diverse patients experiencing anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition.
    2. The student will give examples of subjective and objective data for patients experiencing anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition.
    3. The student will explain evidence-based nursing interventions for patients experiencing anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition.
    4. The student will identify evidence-based collaborative management for patients experiencing anxiety, alterations in affect, and alterations in cognition.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients experiencing anxiety, affective alterations, and cognitive alterations.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will describe national patient safety goals for patients experiencing suicidal ideation or demonstrating self harm.
    2. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators of patients experiencing assaultive behavior toward others due to anxiety, alterations in affect, or alterations in cognition.
    3. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients at risk for injury to others or self due to alterations in cognition.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Foundations of Psychiatric Nursing
      1. Role of the nurse in the continuum of care
      2. Psychosocial, ethical, and socio‐cultural concepts
    2. Mental Health and the Nursing Process
      1. Nursing process
      2. Mental health assessment
      3. Psychobiological basis of behavior
      4. Continuum of care
    3. Psychotherapeutic/Milieu Management
      1. Therapeutic relationship
      2. Therapeutic communication
    4. Management of Patients with Depression and Suicidal Ideations
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antidepressant agents
      3. Electroconvulsive therapy
    5. Management of Patients with Mania
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antimanic agents
    6. Management of Patients with Schizophrenia
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antipsychotic agents
      3. Antiparkinsonian agents
    7. Management of Patients with Anxiety
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antianxiety agents
    8. Management of Adolescent and Young Adult Patients
      1. Normal growth and development
      2. Nursing process
      3. Somatic therapies

    Primary Faculty
    Tschirhart, Susan
    Secondary Faculty
    Lucas, Elizabeth
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1456 - Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing B

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1446 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 1475

    (replaces NURS 1455)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing health problems related to chemical dependency, personality disorders, and organic mental disorders. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can explain the role of evidence in determining best clinical practice and differentiate clinical opinion from research and evidence summaries for patients experiencing chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will explain the role of evidence in the nursing care of culturally‐diverse patients experiencing chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.
    2. The student will give examples of subjective and objective data for patients experiencing chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.
    3. The student will explain evidence‐based nursing interventions for patients experiencing chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.
    4. The student will identify evidence‐based collaborative management for patients experiencing chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can identify national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients experiencing health problems related to chemical dependency, personality disorders, eating disorders, violence and abuse, organic mental disorders, and grief and loss.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will describe national patient safety goals of patients experiencing withdrawal from chemical dependency.
    2. The student will describe national patient safety goals for patients experiencing a seizure.
    3. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients experiencing violence or abuse.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Management of Patients with Substance Related Disorders
      1. Mood altering chemicals
      2. Dysfunctional behavior patterns
      3. Nursing process
      4. Antialcohol agents
    2. Dual Diagnosis
      1. Definition and etiology
      2. Treatment issues
      3. Psychotherapeutic management
    3. Community‐based Care
      1. Community mental health models
      2. Outpatient services
      3. Psychiatric home care
      4. Community outreach programs
      5. Residential services
      6. Homelessness
    4. Management of Patients with Cognitive Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Alzheimer’s disease
      3. Family caring for patients
      4. Closed head injuries
      5. Seizure disorders
      6. Anticonvulsant agents
      7. Cholinesterase inhibitors
    5. Management of Patients with Personality Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Cluster A personality disorders
      3. Cluster B personality disorders
      4. Cluster C personality disorders
    6. Crisis Intervention
      1. Definition and description
      2. Phases of crisis
      3. Types of crisis
      4. Methods of crisis intervention
    7. Survivors of Violence
      1. Nursing process
      2. Battered women survivors
      3. Child abuse survivors
      4. Elder abuse survivors
      5. Rape survivors
      6. Forensic nursing
    8. Management of HIV/AIDS
      1. Nursing process
      2. Neuropsychiatric factors
      3. Psychosocial factors
      4. Grief and loss
    9. Psychological Aspects of Physiological Illness
      1. Nursing process
      2. Historical overview
      3. Stress
      4. Persons at risk
    10. Management of Patients with Eating Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Anorexia nervosa
      3. Bulimia nervosa

    Primary Faculty
    Tschirhart, Susan
    Secondary Faculty
    Lucas, Elizabeth
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 1475 - Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing Clinical

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1355 and NURS 1365 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 1446 and NURS 1456

    (replaces NURS 1465)

    This patient-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing care of adolescent, young adult, adult, and elderly patients with mental health disorders. The student will practice critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for patients. Major emphasis will be on the nursing care of patients with anxiety disorders, affective disorders, and thinking disorders. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Contact Hours: 9 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient‐centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate effective use of the nursing process while caring for the patient with mental health disorders.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in assessment/data collection (i.e., labs, diagnostics, medications, etc).
    2. The student will develop/document/prioritize nursing diagnoses based on assessment data.
    3. The student will develop outcomes that are specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time‐limited.
    4. The student will formulate with the patient/family a plan of care that prescribes evidence‐based interventions to attain patient outcomes.
    5. The student will identify drug effects and nursing interventions appropriate to the medication for assigned patients.
    6. The student will correctly compute and safely administer drugs.
    7. The student will perform nursing interventions safely, in a timely manner.
    8. The student will provide care with sensitivity and respect for human diversity.
    9. The student will evaluate the patient’s progress toward identified outcomes.
    10. The student will revise nursing plan of care as indicated.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate therapeutic communication techniques, including teaching patients and families, in the mental health setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document accurately, completely and consistently on all patient records and assignments.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and the RN.
    3. The student will communicate therapeutically with the patient and family.
    4. The student will communicate patient care issues with other health care professionals.
    5. The student will teach patient, family, and groups based on identified learning needs.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate qualities and behaviors of the professional nurse in psychiatric settings.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.
    5. The student will recognize own limitations, seek assistance from faculty/staff, and assume responsibility for own learning and professional growth.
    6. The student will be receptive to and use constructive feedback to improve performance.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate use of available technology within the mental health care setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will use patient care equipment safely.
    2. The student will use technology to obtain and record relevant patient data including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Depressive Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antidepressant agents
    2. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Suicidal Ideations
      1. Nursing process
      2. Milieu management
    3. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Mania
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antimanic agents
    4. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Thought Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antipsychotic agents
      3. Antiparkinsonian agents
    5. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Anxiety
      1. Nursing process
      2. Antianxiety agents
    6. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Substance Related Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Dual diagnosis issues
    7. Managing the Care of Patients Experiencing Dementia, Closed Head Injuries, and
    8. Seizure Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Anticonvulsant agents
    9. Managing the Care of Patients with Personality Disorders
      1. Nursing process
      2. Milieu therapy
    10. Managing the Care of Patients in Special Populations
      1. Patients in crisis
      2. Patients who are survivors of violence
      3. Patients with HIV/AIDS
      4. Patients experiencing psychological aspects of physiological illness
      5. Patients experiencing eating disorders
      6. Patients experiencing homelessness

    Primary Faculty
    Tschirhart, Susan
    Secondary Faculty
    Lucas, Elizabeth
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2146 - Childbearing Family Nursing

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1456 and NURS 1475 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2175

    (replaces NURS 2145)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient and family-centered nursing care for the childbearing family. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for the childbearing family.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can apply evidence‐based practice for the childbearing family.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will apply evidence‐based nursing interventions while caring for the patient on the electronic fetal monitor.
    2. The student will apply evidence‐based nursing interventions while providing prenatal care.
    3. The student will apply evidence‐based nursing interventions for the patient experiencing induction/augmentation of labor.
    4. The student will apply evidence‐based nursing interventions for pain management in labor.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can explain national patient safety goals and quality indicators for the childbearing family.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators when caring for the normal newborn and prevention of sudden infant death syndrome.
    2. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators when caring for the breastfeeding mother.
    3. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators when teaching the patient about birth control.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1

    INTRODUCTION TO BIRTH: THE NEWBORN AND POSTPARTUM

    1. The Process of Birth
    2. Parent‐Infant Attachment
    3. Post‐partum Nursing Assessment
    4. Newborn Transition to Extra‐uterine Life
    5. Newborn Nutrition
    6. Introduction to Cesarean Birth‐Scheduled Cases
    7. Birth Control Options
    8. Discharge Planning for Mother and Newborn
    9. Cultural Diversity of the Childbearing Family
    10. Newborn Assessment

    Unit 2

    CARE OF THE LABORING FAMILY

    1. Fetal Assessment
    2. Pharmacologic Management of Pain
    3. Maternal Adaptations to Labor and Birth
    4. Non‐pharmacologic Management of Pain
    5. Nursing Care of the Laboring Woman

    Unit 3

    PREGNANCY, ABORTION, AND PARENTING

    1. Pregnancy
      1. Preconception care
      2. 1st trimester
      3. 2nd trimester
      4. 3rd trimester
    2. Nursing Ethics and Elective Abortion
    3. Parenting Education
    4. Pharmacology Content
      1. Antibiotics
      2. Birth Control
      3. Immune globulins
      4. Oxytocics
      5. Narcotics
      6. Nonsteriodal Anti‐inflammatory agents
      7. Vaccines
      8. Vitamins

    Primary Faculty
    DeBoer, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Panek, Krystina
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2156 - Complications of Childbearing Nursing

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2146 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 2175

    (replaces NURS 2155)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient and family-centered nursing care for the high-risk childbearing family and on women’s health. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for the women and the childbearing family.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can apply evidence-based practice for women experiencing a high risk pregnancy, high risk newborns, and patients with gynecologic problems.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will apply evidence-based nursing interventions for patients with pregnancy induced hypertension, gestational diabetes, and preterm labor.
    2. The student will apply evidence-based nursing interventions for patients with gynecologic problems.
    3. The student will apply evidence-based nursing interventions for high risk newborns.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can explain national patient safety goals and quality indicators for high risk maternity, high risk newborn, and gynecologic patients.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators for the pregnant patient with diabetes.
    2. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators related to women experiencing breast cancer.
    3. The student will describe national patient safety goals and quality indicators for the newborn experiencing hyperbilirubinemia.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT 1

    COMPLICATIONS OF CHILDBEARING

    1. Hypertensive Disorders of Pregnancy
      1. Chronic hypertension
      2. Preeclampsia
      3. Eclampsia
      4. HELLP syndrome
      5. Pharmacology: Antihypertensives, anticonvulsants
    2. Complications of Pregnancy
      1. Hemorrhagic conditions
      2. Ectopic pregnancy
      3. Placenta previa/Abruptio placenta
      4. Abortion
      5. Premature rupture of membranes
      6. Pharmacology: Oxytocics
    3. Intrapartum Complications
      1. Shoulder dystocia
      2. Prolapsed cord
      3. Uterine rupture
      4. Uterine inversion
    4. Endocrine and Metabolic Disorders
      1. Diabetes
      2. Hyperemesis gravidarum
      3. Pharmacology: Insulins
    5. Antepartal Fetal Assessment
      1. Ultrasonography
      2. Blood tests
      3. Chorionic villus sampling
      4. Amniocentesis
      5. Fetal surveillance
    6. Complications of Pregnancy
      1. Cardiovascular disorders
      2. Anemias
      3. Trauma
      4. Infections
      5. Rh incompatibility
      6. Pharmacology: Immunoglobulins, antianemics
    7. Childbearing Family with Special Needs
      1. Adolescent pregnancy
      2. Delayed pregnancy
      3. Substance abuse
      4. Loss and grief
      5. Violence against women
    8. Labor and Birth at Risk
      1. Dysfunctional labor
      2. Premature rupture of membranes
      3. Preterm labor
      4. Prolonged pregnancy
      5. Intrapartum emergencies
      6. Pharmacology: Oxytocic, prostaglandins
    9. Postpartum Complications
      1. Postpartum hemorrhage
      2. Thromboembolic disease
      3. Postpartum infections
      4. Postpartum depression
      5. Pharmacology: Oxytocic, antibiotics, prostaglandins

    UNIT 2

    NEWBORN COMPLICATIONS

    1. Genetics and genetic disorders
    2. Ethical, Social, and Legal Issues
      1. Ethics and bioethics
      2. Social
      3. Legal
    3. Gestational Age and Birth Weight
      1. Preterm infant
      2. Postdate and post mature infants
      3. Small for gestational age infant
      4. Large for gestational age infant
    4. Acquired and Congenital Problems of the Neonate
      1. Acquired and congenital respiratory complications
      2. Hyperbilirubinemia
      3. Neonatal infections
      4. Infants of diabetic mothers
      5. Prenatal drug exposure
      6. Phenylketonuria
      7. Cardiac defects
      8. Gastrointestinal defects
      9. Central nervous system defects

    UNIT 3

    WOMEN’S HEALTH

    1. Infertility
      1. Factors contributing to infertility
      2. Evaluation of infertility
      3. Responses to infertility
      4. Outcomes after infertility therapy
      5. Pharmacology: fertility drugs
    2. Health Assessment, Screening, and Prevention
    3. Problems of the Breast
      1. Benign conditions of the breast
      2. Malignant conditions of the breast
      3. Pharmacology: antiestrogen
    4. Experiences and Disorders of the Menstrual Cycle
      1. Common menstrual disorders
      2. Menopause
      3. Pharmacology: Hormones
    5. Disorders and Neoplasms of the Reproductive Tract
      1. Structural disorders
      2. Benign neoplasms
      3. Sexually transmitted diseases
      4. Endometriosis
      5. Osteoporosis
      6. Premenstrual syndrome
      7. Malignant neoplasms of the endometrium, cervix, and ovary
      8. Pharmacology: antiestrogens, antibiotics, hormones

    Primary Faculty
    Panek, Krystina
    Secondary Faculty
    DeBoer, Karen
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2175 - Childbearing Family Nursing Clinical

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 1456 and NURS 1475 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2146 and NURS 2156

    (replaces NURS 2165)

    This patient and family-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing care. Utilizing the nursing process, the student will develop critical thinking skills, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for mothers and their families during the childbearing cycle. New skills emphasized during this rotation include infant assessment, evaluating electronic fetal monitoring data, and supporting new families during their childbirth experience. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 9 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient and family-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can apply the nursing process to patients and families in maternity settings.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in assessment/data collection (i.e., labs, diagnostics, medications, etc).
    2. The student will develop/document/prioritize nursing diagnoses based on assessment data.
    3. The student will develop outcomes that are specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time-limited.
    4. The student will formulate with the patient/family a plan of care that prescribes evidence-based interventions to attain identified patient outcomes.
    5. The student will identify drug effects and nursing interventions appropriate to the medication for assigned patients.
    6. The student will correctly compute and safely administer drugs.
    7. The student will perform nursing interventions safely, in a timely manner.
    8. The student will provide care with sensitivity and respect for human diversity.
    9. The student will evaluate the patient’s progress toward identified outcomes.
    10. The student will revise nursing plan of care as indicated.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can utilize therapeutic communication techniques to communicate purposely and effectively with the childbearing patient and healthcare team.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document accurately, completely, and consistently on all patient records and assignments.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and RN.
    3. The student will communicate therapeutically with the patient and family.
    4. The student will communicate patient care issues with other health care professionals.
    5. The student will teach patient, family, and groups based on identified learning needs.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze qualities and behaviors of the professional nurse in the maternity setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.
    5. The student will recognize own limitations, seek assistance from faculty/staff, and assume responsibility for own learning and professional growth.
    6. The student will be receptive to and use constructive feedback to improve performance.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate use of complex technology within the obstetric and gynecologic healthcare setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will use patient care equipment safely.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant patient data including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Antepartum
    2. Intrapartum 
    3. Vaginal Delivery
    4. Cesarean Section Delivery
    5. Post Partum Care of:
      1. Normal low risk mother
      2. Normal low risk newborn
    6. Intravenous Catheter Insertion
    7. Medication Administration
      1. Newborn intramuscular injection
      2. Direct intravenous route
    8. Patient Simulator Experience

    Primary Faculty
    Panek, Krystina
    Secondary Faculty
    DeBoer, Karen
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2245 - Intermediate Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing A

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2156 and NURS 2175 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2265

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2510)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing problems related to the cardiovascular and hematologic systems. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply evidence‐based practice for patients with cardiovascular and hematologic problems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will interpret subjective and objective data for patients with cardiovascular and hematologic problems.
    2. The student will interpret data to select appropriate nursing diagnoses and collaborative problems.
    3. The student will describe evidence‐based collaborative management for the patient with cardiovascular and hematologic problems.
    4. The student will choose evidence‐based nursing interventions for patients with cardiovascular and hematologic problems.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients with cardiovascular and hematologic problems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will describe quality indicators for patients with heart failure.
    2. The student will discuss quality indicators for patients with acute coronary syndromes.
    3. The student will identify national patient safety goals for patients receiving blood transfusions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT 1 Cardiovascular System

    1. Cardiac Function
      1. Anatomy
        1. Structures
        2. Blood supply
      2. Mechanical properties
        1. Cardiac output
        2. Stroke volume
        3. Preload
        4. Afterload
        5. Contractility
        6. Heart rate
    2. Vascular Function
      1. Arterial pressure
        1. Pulse pressure
        2. Mean arterial pressure
        3. Peripheral vascular resistance
      2. Venous pressure
      3. Capillary pressure
      4. Regulation of cardiac function and blood pressure
        1. Autonomic nervous system
        2. Sympathetic system
        3. Parasympathetic system
        4. Baroreceptors
        5. Stretch receptors
        6. Chemoreceptors
        7. Hormonal influences
    3. Aging Effects
    4. Cardiac Assessment
      1. Health history
      2. Physical assessment
      3. Diagnostic tests
    5. Cardiac Function Disorders
      1. Coronary artery disease
        1. Atherosclerosis
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        2. Angina pectoris
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        3. Myocardial infarction
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        4. Quality indicators
      2. Heart failure
        1. Etiology/pathology
        2. Medical/nursing management
        3. Quality indicators
    6. Cardiac Structure Disorders
      1. Infectious disorders
        1. Rheumatic fever
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        2. Infective endocarditis
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        3. Pericarditis
          1. Etiology/pathology
          2. Medical/nursing management
        4. Cardiac tamponade
      2. Cardiomyopathy
        1. Etiology/pathology
        2. Medical/nursing management
      3. Valvular heart disease
        1. Mitral valve disease
        2. Aortic valve disease
        3. Tricuspid and pulmonic valve disease
        4. Etiology/pathology
        5. Medical/nursing management
      4. Cardiac surgery
        1. Types
        2. Surgical management
        3. Nursing management
    7. Vascular Disorders
      1. Vascular assessment
        1. History
        2. Physical examination
        3. Diagnostic tests
      2. Hypertension
        1. Pathology
        2. Clinical manifestations
        3. Medical/nursing management
        4. Malignant hypertension
      3. Acute/chronic venous pathology
        1. Superficial thrombophlebitis
        2. Deep vein thrombosis
          1. Medical/nursing management
        3. Chronic venous insufficiency
          1. Venous stasis ulceration
          2. Varicose veins
          3. Medical/nursing management
      4. Acute/chronic arterial pathology
        1. Chronic arterial occlusion
          1. Clinical manifestations
          2. Medical/nursing management
        2. Acute arterial occlusion
          1. Clinical manifestations
          2. Medical/nursing management
        3. Aneurysms
          1. Abdominal aortic aneurysms
          2. Aortic dissection
          3. Thoracic aortic aneurysms
        4. Raynaud’s syndrome
    8. Shock
      1. Hypovolemic
      2. Cardiogenic
      3. Distributive
        1. Neural‐induced
        2. Chemical‐induced
          1. Anaphlaxis
          2. Sepsis
      4. Medical/nursing management
    9. Disorders of Cardiac Rhythm
      1. Electrophysiologic properties
        1. Action potential
        2. Depolarization
        3. Repolarization
        4. Excitability
        5. Automaticity
        6. Conductivity
        7. Refractoriness
        8. Cardiac conduction system
        9. Cardiac cycle
      2. Sinus rhythms
      3. Atrial dysrhythmias
      4. Ventricular dysrhythmias
      5. Pulseless electrical activity
      6. Medical management
        1. Defibrillation
        2. Cardioversion
        3. Medications
      7. Surgical management
        1. Pacemakers
      8. Nursing management

    UNIT 2 Hematologic System

    1. Hematology Assessment
      1. Blood elements
        1. Erythrocytes
        2. Leukocytes
        3. Thrombocytes (platelets)
      2. History
      3. Physical examination
      4. Diagnostic tests
        1. Bone marrow aspiration
    2. Hematological Disorders
      1. Anemia
        1. Iron deficiency anemia
        2. Pernicious anemia
        3. Aplastic anemia
        4. Hemolytic anemia
        5. Acute hemorrhage anemia
        6. Chronic hemorrhage anemia
        7. Clinical manifestations
        8. Medical management
        9. Nursing management
      2. Polycythemia
      3. Platelet disorders
      4. Transfusion of blood components
        1. Types
        2. Procedure
        3. Transfusion reactions

    UNIT 3 Pharmacology

    1. Antihyperlipidemic Agents
      1. Bile sequestering agents
      2. Reductase inhibitors
      3. Fibric acid derivatives
      4. Nicotinic acid (Niacin)
      5. Cholesterol absorption inhibitor
    2. Vasodilators
      1. Nitrates
      2. Arteriolar dilator drugs
      3. Arterial and venous dilator drugs
    3. Alpha Blockers
    4. Beta‐Adrenergic Blockers
    5. Calcium‐Channel Blockers
      1. Antianginal
      2. Antiarrhythmic
      3. Antihypertensive
    6. Positive Inotropes
      1. Cardiac glycosides
      2. Phosphodiesterase inhibitors
    7. Adrenergic Agents
    8. Diuretics Agents
      1. Thiazides
      2. Loop diuretics
      3. Potassium‐sparing diuretics
    9. Angiotensin‐Converting Enzyme Inhibitors (ACE‐I)
    10. Angiotensin II ‐ Receptor Blockers (ARB)
    11. Centrally Acting Alpha Agonists
    12. Antidysrhythmics
      1. Class I
      2. Class II: Beta‐Blockers
      3. Class III
      4. Class IV: Calcium‐Channel Blockers
      5. Unclassified
    13. Coagulation Modifiers
      1. Antiplatelets
      2. Anticoagulants
      3. Thrombolytics
      4. Others
    14. Blood‐Forming Agents

    Primary Faculty
    Tuoriniemi, Pamela
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2255 - Intermediate Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing B

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2245 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 2265

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2520)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing urinary, renal, and endocrine system problems. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for culturally-diverse patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 6 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. Analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply evidence‐based practice for patients with urinary, renal, and endocrine problems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will interpret subjective and objective data for patients with urinary, renal, and endocrine problems.
    2. The student will interpret data to select appropriate nursing diagnoses and collaborative problems.
    3. The student will describe evidence‐based collaborative management for the patient with urinary, renal, and endocrine problems.
    4. The student will choose evidence‐based nursing interventions for patients with urinary, renal, and endocrine problems.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    2. Recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain national patient safety goals and quality indicators for patients with urinary, renal, and endocrine problems.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. The student will describe and apply the national patient safety goals addressing minimization of indwelling catheter‐related infections.
    2. The student will describe and apply the quality indicators addressing prevention of urinary tract infections.
    3. The student will describe and apply the quality indicators for the diabetic patient population.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    •  The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1 Urinary Disorders

    1. Overview
      1. Physiology associated with aging
      2. Diagnostic studies of urinary and renal system
      3. Patient safety/best practices prior to diagnostic studies
    2. Infectious Disorders: Cystitic, Interstitial Cystitis
      1. Pathophysiology/risk factors
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
        1. Pharmacological management
        2. Urinary elimination management
        3. Other interventions
      5. Evidence‐based practice/quality indicators for urinary catheters
      6. Cultural, ethnic, and/or gender considerations
    3. Non‐infectious Disorders: Strictures, Incontinence, Urolithiasis, Urothelial Cancer
      1. Pathophysiology/risk factors
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
        1. Non‐surgical management
          1. Behavioral
          2. Nutritional
          3. Pharmacological management
        2. Surgical management
        3. Other interventions
      5. Cultural, ethnic, and/or gender considerations

    Unit 2 Renal Disorders

    1. Overview
      1. Physiology associated with aging
      2. Functions of the kidney
    2. Congenital Disorders: Polycystic Kidney Disease
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
    3. Obstructive Disorders: Hydronephrosis, Hydroureter, Strictures
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment
      3. Collaborative management and interventions
    4. IV. Infectious Disorders: Pyelonephritis
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
    5. Immunologic Disorders: Acute and Chronic Glomerulonphritis, Nephrotic Syndrome
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
    6. Degenerative Disorders: Nephrosclerosis, Renovascular Disease, Diabetic Nephropathy
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment
      3. Collaborative management and interventions
    7. Renal Cell Carcinoma
      1. Pathophysiology
      2. Assessment/clinical manifestations
      3. Diagnostics
      4. Collaborative management and interventions
    8. Renal Trauma
      1. Assessment
      2. Collaborative management
        1. Non‐surgical
        2. Surgical

    Unit 3 Renal Failure

    1. Overview
      1. Review of terms
      2. Progression
    2. Acute Kidney Injury
      1. Etiology and pathophysiology
      2. Types
        1. Prerenal
        2. Intrarenal
        3. Postrenal
      3. Clinical course
        1. Onset phase
        2. Oliguric phase
        3. Diuretic phase
        4. Recovery phase
      4. Assessment
        1. Physical assessment/history
        2. Clinical manifestations
        3. Diagnostics
      5. Collaborative management
        1. Drug therapy
        2. Nutrition management
        3. Dialysis therapies
          1. Hemodialysis
          2. Peritoneal dialysis
          3. Access sites
          4. Other therapies
    3. Chronic Kidney Disease
      1. Pathophysiology
        1. Stages
        2. Kidney changes
        3. Metabolic changes
        4. Hematologic changes
        5. Gastrointestinal changes
        6. Neurological changes
      2. Incidence/prevalence
      3. Collaborative management and interventions
        1. Assessment/physical and psychosocial
        2. Clinical manifestations
        3. Lab assessment and other diagnostics
        4. Specific nursing care issues
      4. Cultural and ethnic disparities
    4. Renal Replacement Therapies
      1. Hemodialysis
        1. Patient selection
        2. Procedure
        3. Access
        4. Nursing care while on dialysis
        5. Post‐procedure care
        6. Complications
      2. Peritoneal dialysis
        1. Patient selection
        2. Procedure
        3. Complications
        4. Nursing care during dialysis
    5. Renal Transplantation
      1. Candidate selection
      2. Donors
      3. Preoperative care
      4. Operative procedures
      5. Immunosuppressive drug therapy
      6. Manifestations of Organ Rejection
      7. Health teaching and resources
    6. Evidence‐Based Practice and Safety Related to Renal Failure
      1. Quality of life issues
      2. Adherence to medication regimen

    Unit 4 Endocrine Disorders

    1. Endocrine Assessment
      1. Anatomy and physiology overview
      2. Endocrine changes associated with aging
      3. Assessment
        1. Physical
        2. Lab
        3. Diagnostic
    2. Diabetes: A Focus on Complications
      1. Overview of diabetes mellitus
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Incidence
        3. Clinical manifestations
        4. Diagnostics
        5. Pharmacological management
          1. Insulin
          2. Oral agents
        6. Collaborative management
        7. Quality indicators related to diabetes
      2. Acute complications of diabetes
        1. Diabetic ketoacidosis
          1. Pathophysiology
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Collaborative management
          4. Prevention
        2. Hyperglycemic‐hyperosmolar state
          1. Pathophysiology
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Collaborative management
        3. Hypoglycemia
          1. Symptoms ‐ neuroglycopenic and neurogenic
          2. Management
          3. Prevention
      3. Chronic complications of diabetes
        1. Macrovascular
          1. Cardiovascular
          2. Cerebrovascular
        2. Microvascular
          1. Eye and vision
          2. Diabetic nephropathy
          3. Neuropathies ‐ polyneuropathies and autonomic neuropathies
    3. Disorders of the Thyroid Gland
      1. Hyperthyroidism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Collaborative management
          1. Assessment
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Diagnostic assessment
          4. Interventions
          5. Best practices for patient safety and quality care
    4. Disorders of the Parathyroid Gland
      1. Hyperparathyroidism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Collaborative management
          1. Assessment
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Interventions
      2. Hypoparathyroidism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Collaborative management
          1. Assessment
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Interventions
    5. Disorders of the Adrenal Gland
      1. Adrenal gland hypofunction ‐ Addison’s
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Collaborative management
          1. Assessment
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Labs
          4. Interventions
        3. Best practice for patient safety and quality care
      2. Adrenal gland hyperfunction ‐ Cushing’s
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Collaborative management
          1. Assessment
          2. Clinical manifestations
          3. Labs
          4. Interventions
        3. Hyperaldosteronism
        4. Pheochromocytoma
          1. Pathophysiology
          2. Assessment
          3. Interventions
    6. Pituitary Disorders
      1. Hypopituitarism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Management
      2. Hyperpituitarism
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Interventions
          1. Surgical
          2. Non‐surgical
    7. Disorders of the Posterior Pituitary Gland
      1. Diabetes insipidus
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Assessment
        3. Interventions
      2. Syndrome of inappropriate ADH
        1. Pathophysiology
        2. Assessment
        3. Interventions
    8. Pharmacological Management
      1. Urinary Disorders
        1. Sulfonamides
        2. Fluoroquinolones
        3. Urinary antiseptics
        4. Drugs used for BPH
          1. Alpha blockers
          2. 5alpha reductase inhibitors
        5. Drugs used for Erectile Dysfunction
      2. Renal Impairment
        1. Calcium products/Phosphate binders
        2. Vitamin D preparations
        3. Erythropoietin
      3. Diabetes
        1. Review of insulins
        2. Review of oral hypoglycemic agents
        3. Insulin drip to treat DKA
      4. Thyroid Disorders
        1. Antithyroid drugs
        2. Thyroid hormone replacement
      5. Adrenal Disorders
        1. Adrenocorticoids/Mineralocorticoids
        2. Drugs for Cushing’s disease
      6. Pituitary Disorders
        1. Posterior Pituitary Hormones
        2. Drugs for Acromegaly

    Primary Faculty
    Knesek, Andrea
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2265 - Intermediate Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing Clinical

    Credit Hours: 2.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2156 and NURS 2175 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2245 and NURS 2255

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2530)

    This patient-centered clinical course gives students opportunities to develop skills in nursing care provision and management for a variety of adult patients. Using the framework of the nursing process, the student will practice critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for patients with life-span changes. The focus will be on the nursing care of patients with anemia, cardiovascular, peripheral vascular, endocrine, and renal problems. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Contact Hours: 15 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 5.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    3. Demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient-centered care.

    Course Outcome:

    1. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the nursing process to patients and families in the intermediate medical‐surgical (adult hospital telemetry) setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in physical assessment of adults with anemia, cardiovascular, peripheral vascular, endocrine, and renal problems.
    2. The student will identify drug actions and nursing interventions appropriate to medications used to treat anemia, cardiovascular, peripheral vascular, endocrine, and renal problems.
    3. The student will correctly compute and administer drugs to patients experiencing anemia, cardiovascular, peripheral vascular, endocrine, and renal problems.
    4. The student will perform nursing interventions safely with patients experiencing anemia, cardiovascular, peripheral vascular, endocrine, and renal problems.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    4. Communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome:

    2. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize therapeutic communication techniques to communicate purposely and effectively with patients and healthcare team in the adult hospital telemetry setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will document care accurately and consistently.
    2. The student will report changes in a patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and the RN.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    5. Demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome:

    3. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze qualities and behaviors of the professional nurse in the adult hospital telemetry setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.

     

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    6. Utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome:

    4. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate use of complex technology within the adult hospital telemetry setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will perform nursing interventions safely using complex technology with adult patients.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant patient data, including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    •  The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    •  The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    •  The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Student will be Assigned to Care for Patients with Problems in the Following Areas:
      1. Cardiovascular problems: myocardial infarction, angina, hypertension, chronic heart failure, valve disease, rhythm disturbances, or peripheral vascular disease
      2. Anemia
      3. Fluid and electrolyte problems with emphasis on patients receiving IV therapy
      4. Renal disease
      5. Diabetes complications
      6. Thyroid, adrenal, parathyroid, pituitary problems
      7. Urinary tract disorders
      8. Others as assigned by clinical faculty
    2. The Clinical Lab will Focus on:
      1. Cardiac telemetry interpretation
      2. Dressing techniques for central lines and venous access devices
      3. Intravenous therapy review
      4. Mock code
      5. Simulation of patient experiencing a cardiovascular crisis

    Primary Faculty
    Tuoriniemi, Pamela
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2346 - Childhood Nursing A

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2255 and NURS 2265 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2375

    (replaces NURS 2345)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient and family-centered nursing care for children experiencing problems related to fluid and electrolyte imbalances, impaired immune responses, and alterations in the respiratory, genitourinary, integumentary, and gastrointestinal systems. This course emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for pediatric patients and their families. In addition, the course covers growth and development of toddler, preschool, and school-aged children.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome 1: The student can analyze evidence‐based practice for pediatric patients with acute and chronic health problems.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with fluid and electrolyte imbalances.
    2. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with genitourinary alterations.
    3. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with respiratory alterations.
    4. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with integumentary system alterations.
    5. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with impaired immune responses.
    6. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with gastrointestinal alterations.
    7. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the toddler, preschool, and school‐age child.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome 2: The student can identify quality improvement measures and national patient safety resources for pediatric patients with acute and chronic health problems.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with fluid and electrolyte imbalances.
    2. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with genitourinary alterations.
    3. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with respiratory alterations.
    4. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with integumentary system alterations.
    5. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with impaired immune responses.
    6. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with gastrointestinal alterations.
    7. The student will analyze and apply developmental theories and nursing strategies in the care of the toddler, preschool, and school‐age child.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Child with Fluid and Electrolyte Alterations
      1. Nursing assessment of fluid and electrolyte balance in infants and children
      2. Fluid and electrolyte imbalances in the child
        1. Edema
        2. Dehydration
      3. Acid-base imbalances in the child
        1. Metabolic acidosis and alkalosis
        2. Respiratory acidosis and alkalosis
      4. Therapeutic management of imbalances resulting from gastrointestinal losses
        1. Oral replacement
        2. IV therapy
        3. Total parenteral nutrition
    2. The Child with Genitourinary Health Deviations
      1. Defects of the genitourinary tract
        1. Hypospadias, epispadias
        2. Cryptorchidism
        3. Hydrocele
      2. Acquired problems in urine elimination
        1. Urinary tract infections, pyelonephritis
        2. Vesicoureteral reflux
      3. Alteration in urine filtration
        1. Nephrotic syndrome
        2. Acute and chronic kidney disease
        3. Hemolytic Uremic Syndrome (HUS)
    3. The Child with Respiratory Health Deviations
      1. Assessment of respiratory function in children
      2. Noninfectious problems
        1. Infant apnea and apparent life-threatening event (ALTE)
        2. Respiratory distress syndrome
        3. Bronchopulmonary dysplasia (BPD) / chronic lung disease (CLD)
        4. Cystic fibrosis
        5. Sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS)
        6. Epistaxis
        7. Allergic rhinitis
        8. Asthma
      3. Respiratory infections - upper respiratory
        1. Pharyngitis, tonsillitis, otitis media
        2. Laryngotracheobronchitis (LTB), epiglottitis
      4. Respiratory infections - lower respiratory
        1. Bronchitis, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), bronchiolitis
        2. Pneumonia
      5. Mechanical and surgical intervention
        1. Intubation and mechanical ventilation
        2. Tonsillitis and tonsillectomy
        3. Tracheostomy care
    4. Nursing Strategies for the Toddler/Preschool Child
      1. Developmental challenges
      2. Developmental milestones
      3. Psychosocial and psychosexual development
      4. Cognitive and moral development
      5. Injury prevention and health promotion
    5. Nursing Strategies for the School-Age Child
      1. Family and peer relationships
      2. Developmental requisites
      3. Biologic and psychosocial development
      4. Cognitive and moral development
      5. Injury prevention and health promotion
    6. The Child with Gastrointestinal Health Deviations - Bowel Elimination and Nutrition
      1. Nutritional guidelines and childhood obesity
      2. Malabsorptive alterations
        1. Celiac disease
        2. Cystic fibrosis
      3. Congenital malformations
        1. Cleft lip and cleft palate
        2. Esophageal atresia, tracheoesophageal fistula
      4. Acquired conditions affecting movement of nutrients
        1. Pyloric stenosis, gastroesophageal reflux, inguinal and umbilical hernias
        2. Ingestion of foreign body - esophageal
        3. Short bowel syndrome
      5. Congenital malformations
        1. Omphalocele, gastroschisis
        2. Anorectal malformations
        3. Hirschsprung Disease
      6. Inflammatory conditions in bowel elimination
        1. Meckel’s diverticulum, appendicitis
        2. Necrotizing enterocolitis (NEC)
      7. Obstructive disorders of bowel elimination
        1. Hypertrophic pyloric stenosis
        2. Intussusception
    7. The Child with Integumentary Health Deviations
      1. Assessment of the integument
      2. Disorders affecting the skin
        1. Diaper dermatitis
        2. Monilial infections
        3. Pediculosis (Lice), Tinea (Ringworm), Mites (Scabies), Seborrheic dermatitis, Cellulitis, Impetigo
        4. Non-infectious skin disorders
        5. Atopic dermatitis (eczema)
        6. Acne vulgaris
        7. Steven-Johnson Syndrome
      3. Burn injuries
        1. Burn wound characteristics
        2. Therapeutic management
    8. The Child with Immune Health Deviations - Immunodeficiency and Hypersensitivity Reactions
      1. Components of the immune system
        1. Humoral and cellular immune responses
      2. Immunodeficiencies
        1. Primary deficiencies - congenital
          1. Severe Combined Immunodeficiency Disease (SCID)
        2. Secondary deficiencies - acquired
          1. Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) 
          2. Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) - pediatric/adult
          3. Sepsis
          4. Infectious mononucleosis
      3. Hypersensitivity reactions type I (Ig E - mediated)
        1. Anaphylaxis
        2. Food allergies and food sensitivities
      4. Vaccines Across the Lifespan
        1. Active and passive immunity
      5. Child Protective Services

    Primary Faculty
    Sawyer, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Bartoy, Julie
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2356 - Childhood Nursing B

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2346 with grade C or better

    Corequisites: NURS 2375

    (replaces NURS 2355)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient and family-centered nursing care for children experiencing problems with neurological dysfunction, cancer, hematological dysfunction, alterations in physical mobility, cardiovascular dysfunction, and diabetes. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for pediatric patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 4 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can analyze and apply the critical components of evidence-based nursing practice.

    Course Outcome: 1. The student can analyze evidence-based practice for nursing care of the child with acute and chronic illnesses.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with neurological dysfunction.
    2. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with cancer.
    3. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with hematological dysfunction.
    4. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with altered physical mobility.
    5. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with cardiovascular dysfunction.
    6. The student will analyze and apply evidence-based nursing care for the child with diabetes.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Course Outcome: 2. The student can explain why continuous quality improvement is an essential part of professional nursing practice and uses national patient safety resources for selected pediatric patients with acute and chronic illnesses.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with neurological dysfunction.
    2. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with cancer.
    3. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with hematological dysfunction.
    4. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with altered physical mobility.
    5. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with cardiovascular dysfunction.
    6. The student will analyze and apply quality improvement/ nursing strategies in the care of the child with diabetes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Child with a Neurologic Alteration
      1. Assessment of neurologic function
        1. Diagnostic procedures
        2. Neurologic testing
        3. Increased intracranial pressure
      2. Traumatic alterations of central nervous system (CNS)
        1. Care of the child with a neurologic disorder
        2. Head injuries
      3. Malformations of the CNS
        1. Neural tube defects
          1. Spina bifida occulta
          2. Spina bifida cystica
        2. Hydrocephalus
      4. Intracranial infections
        1. Meningitis
        2. Encephalitis
        3. Reye’s syndrome
      5. Seizure disorders
        1. Childhood epilepsy
        2. Febrile seizures
        3. Neonatal seizures
    2. The Child with a Hematologic Alteration
      1. Red blood cell disorders
        1. Iron deficiency anemia
        2. Lead poisoning 
        3. Sickle cell disease
        4. B-thalassemia
      2. Defects in hemostasis
        1. Hemophilia A (Factor VIII deficiency)
        2. Hemophilia B (Factor IX deficiency)
        3. Immune Thrombocytopenia Purpura (ITP)
    3. The Child with Cancer
      1. Etiologic factors
      2. Properties of malignant cells
      3. Assessment of malignancy
      4. Diagnostic procedures
      5. Modes of therapy
        1. Chemotherapy
        2. Radiation therapy
        3. Hemopoietic Stem cell Transplant
        4. Biologic response modifiers
      6. Cancers of the blood and lymph systems
        1. Acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL)
        2. Acute myeloblastic leukemia (AML)
      7. Nervous system tumors
        1. Brain tumors
        2. Neuroblastoma
      8. Bone tumors
        1. Osteogenic sarcoma
        2. Ewing’s sarcoma
      9. Other solid tumors
        1. Wilm’s tumor
        2. Rhabdomyosarcoma
        3. Retinoblastoma
    4. The Child with a Musculoskeletal Alteration
      1. Physiology and psychology of prolonged immobilization
        1. Child in a cast
        2. Child in traction or external fixator
      2. Therapeutic Management
      3. Congenital disorders
        1. Developmental hip dysplasia
        2. Congenital clubfoot
        3. Osteogenic imperfecta
        4. Cerebral palsy
        5. Muscular dystrophy
      4. Acquired disorders
        1. Fractures
        2. Legg-Calve-Perthes Disease
        3. Slipped Capital Femoral Epiphysis (SCFE)
      5. Other disorders
        1. Juvenile idopathic arthritis
    5. The Child with a Cardiovascular Alteration
      1. Physiology of the cardiovascular system
      2. Diagnostic procedures for the cardiac deviations
      3. Assessment of congestive heart failure
      4. Congenital Defects
        1. Defects with increased pulmonary blood flow
          1. Patent ductus arteriosis (PDA)
          2. Ventricular septal defect (VSD)
          3. Atrial septal defect (ASD)
        2. Defects with decreased pulmonary blood flow
          1. Tetralogy of fallot (TOF)
        3. Obstructive defects
          1. Coarction of the aorta
        4. Mixed defects
          1. Transposition of the great arteries (TGA)
      5. Acquired cardiovascular disorders
        1. Infective endocarditis
        2. Rheumatic fever
        3. Kawasaki disease
    6. The Child with Endocrine or Metabolic Alterations
      1. Diabetes mellitus
        1. Type 1
        2. Type 2

    Primary Faculty
    Bartoy, Julie
    Secondary Faculty
    Sawyer, Linda
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2375 - Childhood & Family Nursing Clinical

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2255 and NURS 2265 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2346 and NURS 2356

    (replaces NURS 2365)

    This patient and family-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing pediatric care. Using the nursing process, students will develop critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for pediatric patients with various problems. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Off-site, by arrangement

    Contact Hours: 9 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    III. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    V. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient‐centered care.

    Course Outcome: 1. The student can manage the delivery of care based on priority needs of the pediatric patient and family through appraisal of the nursing process.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in assessment/data collection (i.e., labs, diagnostics, medications, etc).
    2. The student will develop/document/prioritize nursing diagnoses base on assessment data.
    3. The student will develop outcomes that are specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time‐limited.
    4. The student will formulate with the patient/family a plan of care that prescribes evidence‐based interventions to attain identified patient outcomes.
    5. The student will identify drug effects and nursing interventions appropriate to the medication for assigned patients.
    6. The student will correctly compute and safely administer drugs.
    7. The student will perform nursing interventions safely, in a timely manner.
    8. The student will provide care with sensitivity and respect for human diversity.
    9. The student will evaluate the patient’s progress toward identified outcomes.
    10. The student will revise nursing plan of care as indicated.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    IV. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Course Outcome: 2. The student can collaborate and manage therapeutic communication within the pediatric healthcare environment.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will document accurately, completely and consistently on all patient records and assignments.
    2. The student will report changes in patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and the RN.
    3. The student will communicate therapeutically with the patient and family.
    4. The student will communicate patient care issues with other health care professionals.
    5. The student will teach patient, family, and groups based on identified learning needs.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Course Outcome: 3. The student can analyze qualities and behaviors of the professional nurse in the pediatric setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.
    5. The student will recognize own limitations, seek assistance from faculty/staff, and assume responsibility for own learning and professional growth.
    6. The student will be receptive to and use constructive feedback to improve performance.

    MCC Common Degree Outcomes:

    I. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    II. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.

    Program Outcome/Student Learning Outcome:

    1. The student can utilize technology appropriately in planning and providing nursing care.

    Course Outcome: 4. The student can demonstrate the ability to problem solve the use of technology within the pediatric healthcare setting.

    Course Objectives:

    1. The student will use patient care equipment safely.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant patient data including nursing care and patient response.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Childhood and Family Nursing Clinical
      1. Student orientation
      2. Professional appearance, attitude, and conduct
      3. Review of course requirements: measures of assessment and clinical evaluation
      4. Physical and psychosocial assessment
      5. Developmental and cultural assessment 
      6. Pediatric dosage calculations and safe medication administration
      7. Accurate and timely documentation
      8. Effective communication
      9. Introduction to Child Life Services
      10. Interdisciplinary collaboration
      11. Nursing process
      12. Patient and/or family education
    2. Growth and Development
      1. Growth measurements and growth charts
      2. Stages of development
      3. Learning and coping mechanisms (ie..play and diversional activities)
      4. Childhood fears
      5. Safety
      6. Nutrition
    3. Human Patient Simulation
    4. Community Services 
      1. Support Groups
      2. School-based nursing

    Primary Faculty
    Sawyer, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Bartoy, Julie
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2445 - Transition to Professional Nursing

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2356 and NURS 2375; HUMN 1700 or PHIL 2100 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2455 and NURS 2465

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2810)

    This theory course focuses on the associate’s degree nurse within the nursing profession. It emphasizes the role of the nurse in response to community healthcare needs and the usage of evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for groups of patients and their families.

    Contact Hours: 3 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice for personal and professional growth.
    2. The student will analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice to manage the healthcare environment.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will recognize quality improvement strategies as an integral component of nursing practice to manage the healthcare environment.
    2. The student will recognize the quality improvement process as an integral component to change nursing practice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Professional Growth and Role Transition
      1. Role
      2. Time management and self‐care strategies
      3. Mentoring
      4. NCLEX preparation and NCLEX exam
      5. Application for licensure
    2. Professional Nursing
      1. Employment process
      2. Development of a resume
      3. Interviewing skills
      4. Role transition
      5. American Nurses Association (ANA) standards of practice
      6. Code of Ethics
      7. Image of nursing and media influence
      8. Education; BSN completion options
    3. Management in Nursing
      1. Effective communication and conflict resolution
      2. Use of SBAR in the clinical setting
      3. Team building and collaboration
      4. Effective delegation; Joint standards ANA and NCSBN on delegation
      5. Conflict management and problem solving
    4. Nursing Practice
      1. Professionalism
      2. Evidence‐based practice
      3. Quality improvement and patient safety/medication safety
      4. Workplace issues
        1. Violence
        2. Safety and workplace hazards
        3. Emergency preparedness
        4. Impaired nursing practice
        5. Diversity in nursing
        6. Challenges with technology
        7. Ethical challenges
        8. Informatics
        9. Cultural competency

    Primary Faculty
    Knesek, Andrea
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2455 - Advanced Adult Medical-Surgical Nursing

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2356 and NURS 2375; HUMN 1700 or PHIL 2100 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2445 and NURS 2465

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2820)

    This theory course focuses on planning safe, culturally-diverse, patient-centered nursing care for patients experiencing oncologic, neurologic, and musculoskeletal system problems. It emphasizes using evidence-based practice and quality improvement initiatives to develop critical thinking skills in caring for patients and their families.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze evidence‐based practice for patients with mobility, cognition, and selected immune disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice to patients with oncologic disorders.
    2. The student will analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice to patients with neurologic disorders.
    3. The student will analyze and apply the critical components of evidence‐based nursing practice to patients with musculoskeletal disorders.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain why continuous quality improvement is an essential part of professional nursing practice and uses national safety resources for patients with neurologic, orthopedic, and oncologic problems.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will discuss quality indicators for acute stroke patients.
    2. The student will recognize quality indicators for cervical spine treatment.
    3. The student will identify quality indicators for patients with a hip fracture.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Nursing Care of Patients with Oncological Problems
      1. Cancer in the adult patient
        1. Prevention and control
        2. Maintaining wellness during treatment
        3. Rehabilitation
      2. Cancer treatment management
        1. Goals
        2. Modalities
          1. Chemotherapy
            *Alkylating agents
            *Antimetabolites
            *Mitotic inhibitors
            *Antineoplastic antibiotics
            *Topoisomerase inhibitors
            *Miscellaneous agents
          2. Radiation
          3. Biologic response modifiers
          4. Research
          5. Quackery
        3. Evaluation of treatment and modality response
          1. Myelosuppression
          2. Gastrointestinal effects
          3. Integumentary effects
          4. Effects on the reproductive system
          5. Oncologic emergencies
        4. Cancer pain
          1. Pharmacologic interventions
            *Opiates
            *Nonopiates
            *Adjuvants
          2. Home management
          3. Complimentary therapy
        5. Cultural and family influences on cancer
          1. Hospice care
      3. Management of the patient with lymphoma
        1. Hodgkin’s and Non‐Hodgkin’s Lymphoma
      4. Management of the patient with skin cancer
        1. Basal cell carcinoma
        2. Squamous cell carcinoma
        3. Malignant melanoma
        4. Mycosis fungoides
        5. Kaposi’s sarcoma
    2. Nursing Care of Patients with Neurological Problems
      1. Brief review of anatomy and physiology of the neurologic system
      2. Review of assessment of the neurologic dysfunction
        1. Adult life span considerations
        2. Cultural considerations
        3. Diagnostic procedures
      3. Clinical manifestations of neurologic problems
        1. Altered levels of consciousness
        2. Glasgow coma scale
      4. Management of patients with cerebral disorders
        1. Hemorrhagic cerebrovascular disorders
        2. Stroke
        3. Transient ischemic attacks
      5. Management of patients with peripheral nervous system disorders
        1. Lower back pain
        2. Cervical disc disorders
        3. Spinal tumors
        4. Disorders of the cranial nerves
          1. Trigeminal neuralgia
          2. Bell’s palsy
        5. Upper and lower motor lesions
        6. Peripheral neuropathies
      6. Pharmacological interventions
        1. Opiates
        2. Nonopiates
        3. Adjuvants
        4. Antiepileptic drugs
        5. Nimodipine (Nimotop)
        6. Mannitol (Osmitrol)
        7. Dopamine agonists
        8. Dopaminergics
        9. Catechol O-methyltransferase Inhibitors
        10. Cholinesterase inhibitors
        11. N-methyl-D-asparatate (MNDA) receptor antagonist
      7. Management of patients with degenerative neurologic disorders
        1. Creutzfeldt‐Jakob disease
        2. Huntington’s disease
        3. Multiple sclerosis
        4. Guillain‐Barre syndrome
        5. Parkinson’s disease
        6. Myasthenia gravis
        7. Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
      8. Management of patients with neurological trauma
        1. Spinal cord injury
        2. Head and neck injury
    3. Nursing Care of Patients with Musculoskeletal Disorders
      1. Brief review of anatomy and physiology of the musculoskeletal system
      2. Review of assessment of the musculoskeletal system
      3. Adult life span considerations
      4. Diagnostic tests
      5. Management of patients with musculoskeletal disorders
        1. Osteoarthritis
        2. Metabolic bone disorders
        3. Pagets disease
        4. Gout and gouty arthritis
        5. Bone tumors
        6. Pharmacological interventions
          *NSAIDs
          *Opiates
          *Adjuvants
      6. Management of patients with back and neck disorders
      7. Management of patients with musculoskeletal trauma or overuse
        1. Hip fractures
        2. Sports injuries
        3. Overuse syndromes of upper and lower extremities
        4. Rotator cuff tears
        5. Anterior cruciate ligament injuries
        6. Meniscal injuries
      8. Management of patients with autoimmune disease r/t the musculoskeletal system
        1. Rheumatoid arthritis
        2. Systemic lupus erythematosus
        3. Progressive systemic sclerosis
        4. Ankylosing spondylitis
        5. Sjorgen’s syndrome
        6. Fibromyalgia syndrome
        7. Mixed connective tissue disease
        8. Lyme disease
        9. Secondary arthritis

    Primary Faculty
    Nemecek, Kim
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • NURS 2465 - Integration of Nursing Practice Clinical

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Nursing Program; NURS 2356 and NURS 2375; HUMN 1700 or PHIL 2100 all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: NURS 2445 and NURS 2455

    (replaces but does not equate to NURS 2830)

    This patient-centered clinical course helps students develop skills in providing and managing nursing care of diverse adult patients. Utilizing the framework of the nursing process, students will practice critical thinking, communication skills, application of technology, and professional responsibility while safely caring for patients with lifespan changes. Major emphasis will be on nursing care management and delegation of care to a group of patients with neurological, musculoskeletal, and oncology problems. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Location: Off-site, by arrangement

    Contact Hours: 18 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 6
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking by applying the nursing process to provide safe, culturally appropriate, patient‐centered care.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will demonstrate competence in physical assessment when caring for adult patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.
    2. The student will identify drug actions and nursing interventions appropriate to adult patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.
    3. The student will correctly compute and administer drugs to adult patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.
    4. The student will perform nursing interventions safely when caring for patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to communicate effectively with patients, families, and the interdisciplinary healthcare team.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will document care accurately and consistently.
    2. The student will report changes in the patient’s condition promptly to the instructor and RN.
    3. The student will communicate therapeutically with the patient and family.
    4. The student will communicate patient care issues with other health care professionals.
    5. The student will teach the patient, family, and groups based on learning needs.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate professionalism in his/her practice.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will maintain confidentiality of information.
    2. The student will practice within the ethical and legal framework of nursing (ANA Scope and Standard of Practice).
    3. The student will promptly report unsafe, illegal, or inappropriate incidents to faculty and/or staff.
    4. The student will maintain professional appearance, attitude, and conduct.
    5. The student will acknowledge own limitations, seek assistance appropriately from faculty and staff, and assume responsibility for own learning and professional growth.
    6. The student will be receptive to feedback and use same to improve performance.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate problem solving using technology within the adult medical-surgical setting.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will perform nursing interventions safely with adult patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.
    2. The student will utilize technology to obtain and record relevant data with adult patients, including oncology, neurology, and musculoskeletal patient populations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Management Skills
      1. time management
      2. Delegation
      3. Shared governance
      4. Effective communication techniques/use of SBAR
      5. Critical thinking process
      6. Legal/ethical issues
      7. Role of the nurse manager/leader
      8. Problem solving skills
      9. Institution’s mission statement, philosophy
      10. Institution’s organizational structure
      11. Economic, social, demographic forces
      12. Fiscal responsibility, budget for unit
      13. Code of ethics
      14. Change agent
      15. Conflict resolution
      16. Hospital staffing/job description
      17. Managing information and technology
    2. Patient Care
      1. Application of the nursing process using nursing theory
      2. Patient teaching
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Interventions for patients with neurological, musculoskeletal, and oncology problems
      5. Rehabilitation
      6. Cultural diversity
      7. Health promotion
      8. Problem solving/critical thinking skills

    Primary Faculty
    Knesek, Andrea
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Occupational Therapy Assistant

  
  • OTAS 1000 - Foundation Skills of Occupational Therapy Practice

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; BIOL 2710, ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210, HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235

    This course is designed as an introduction to activity and task analysis and the Occupational Therapy Practice Framework. Various activities including crafts and daily tasks are explored for beginning therapeutic application. The course introduces the Occupational Therapy Process and its application as well as the concepts of grading and adapting. Therapeutic activity selection will be emphasized with consideration of the client’s performance skills, performance patterns, client factors, contexts and environment activity occupational demands and their impact to occupation based performance.

    Location: Center Campus

    When Offered: Fall Semester only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate an understanding of occupation, purposeful activity, activity analysis, and the occupational therapy practice framework.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and articulate the terminology associated with occupation, purposeful activity and activity analysis.
    2. Identify and articulate the role of purposeful activity in occupation based intervention.
    3. Articulate an understanding of the occupational therapy practice framework including the profession’s body of knowledge and occupational therapy process.
    4. Identify and articulate the purpose of an activity analysis and the relationship to meaningful intervention.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate basic skill in activity analysis and its role in therapeutic activity selection and implementation.

    Objectives:

    1. Establish basic skill in activity analysis.
    2. Establish basic skill in methods of grading.
    3. Establish basic skill methods of adapting.
    4. Establish recognition of activity/occupational demands.
    5. Establish basic skill in required characteristics of activities.
    6. Establish basic skill in teaching learning concepts and methods of instruction.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate basic skill in the application of therapeutic selection of activity based on the analyzed needs of the client.

    Objectives:

    1. Establish basic skill in determining a client’s occupational profile and occupational analysis utilizing case study analysis through application of the practice framework.
    2. Establish basic skill in determining a client’s intervention needs through application of the practice framework.
    3. Establish basic skill in determining necessary considerations for activity/occupational demands.
    4. Establish basic skill in determining required activity characteristics for optimal client engagement and participation.
    5. Establish basic skill in determining therapeutic activity selection based on evidence of performance, diversity, and demonstrated client need.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction
      1. Terminology associated with activity analysis and occupational performance.
      2. The role of activity media and activity analysis in occupation and purposeful activity.
    2. Occupational Therapy Practice Framework
      1. Concept of best practice
      2. Domains of occupational therapy
        1. Body of knowledge
          1. Areas of occupational therapy
          2. Performance skills - motor, process, social interaction
          3. Performance patterns - habits, roles, routines, rituals
          4. Context and environment
          5. Personal, virtual, cultural, physical/social, temporal
          6. Client Factors - values, beliefs, spirituality, body function/structure
          7. Activity/occupational demands
        2. Occupational Therapy process
          1. Evaluation
          2. Occupational profile
          3. Occupational analysis
          4. Intervention
          5. Planning
          6. Implementation
          7. Review
          8. Outcomes
          9. End result
          10. Engagement and participation
          11. Everyday meaningful activity
    3. Activity Analysis
      1. Purpose and format of an activity analysis and the relationship to occupational performance and intervention
      2. Application to various populations, levels of function, disabilities and diversity
    4. Grading and Adaptation concepts and methods
      1. Identification of areas to grade/adapt based on activity analysis
      2. Methods to grade activities/tasks
      3. Methods to adapt activities/tasks
      4. Therapeutic application to various populations, levels of function, disabilities and diversity
    5. Demonstrations/Step‐By‐Step Teaching
      1. Proficiency in “method of instruction”
      2. Variations of teaching/learning
      3. Meeting therapeutic needs through therapeutic use of self.
    6. Therapeutic Activity Selection
      1. Identify activities best suited for individuals that therapeutically address occupational based performance
      2. Use of client context within the selection process
        1. Activities and/or customs that hold significance to a particular ethnic group or individual
    7. Beginning clinical reasoning
      1. Case Study Applications of Occupational Therapy Practice Framework
      2. Identifying and integrating profile analysis
      3. Identifying and integrating client function through occupational analysis
      4. Articulate reasons for occupational dysfunction
      5. Identify Occupational Therapy problems and evidence of dysfunction
      6. Identify general intervention goals
      7. Identify characteristics of therapeutic activity
      8. Identify activities for therapeutic application
      9. Identify intervention activities of purpose
      10. Articulate evidence for intervention and outcomes

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1012 - Medical & Professional Language in Occupational Therapy Practice Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; BIOL 2710, ENGL 1180 OR ENGL 1210, HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1000, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235

    This course provides an introduction to medical and specific occupational therapy terminology commonly used in both occupational therapy practice and in healthcare. Emphasis is placed on the knowledge of the components of medical terminology and diagnoses, psychiatric diagnoses and terminology, medical abbreviations used by occupational therapy in documentation, and the terminology of occupational therapy practice.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Recognizing and articulating a professional vocabulary of medical terminology and professional terminology.
      1. Define word roots/medical suffixes and prefixes correctly.
      2. Spell word roots/medical suffixes and prefixes correctly.
      3. Apply word roots/medical suffixes and prefixes to build medical terms.
      4. Explain the terminology commonly associated with occupational therapy practice, including physical dysfunction, mental health, and health/wellness promotion.
    2. Recognizing and defining common medical and occupational therapy terms correctly.
      1. Identify and define anatomical terms.
      2. Identify and define medical specialties and systems.
      3. Identify and define psychiatric terms.
      4. Identify and define terminology of the occupational therapy framework.
      5. Identify and define terminology frequently used in occupational therapy practice.
    3. Use basic oral skills and appropriate written skills with medical terms and abbreviation frequently used by the occupational therapy profession.
      1. Use diacritical and accents correctly.
      2. Recognize and define common medical and occupational therapy abbreviations.
      3. Apply medical abbreviations correctly in a medical note.
      4. Recognize frequently used abbreviations in an occupational therapy progress note.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Pronunciation Guidelines
      1. Diacritical marks and accent marks phonetically sound out medical terms
    2. Word Roots
      1. Definition and spelling of word roots
      2. Word roots to build medical terms
    3. Combining Forms
      1. Combining form correctly to build medical terms
    4. Suffixes
      1. Definition and spelling of medical suffixes
      2. Suffixes to build medical terms
    5. Prefixes
      1. Definition and spelling of medical prefixes
      2. Prefixes to build medical terms
    6. Medical Specialties
      1. Medical specialties by function
      2. Definition and spelling of terms which represent medical specialties
    7. Vitals
      1. Definition, spelling and understanding of terminology for vital measures
    8. Anatomical Terms
      1. Definition and spelling of anatomical terms
    9. Systems of the Human Body with Definition and Spelling of Systems Terms
      1. Digestive system
      2. Urinary system
      3. Integumentary system
      4. Male and female reproductive system
      5. Respiratory system
      6. Endocrine system
      7. Nervous system
      8. Musculoskeletal system
      9. Cardiovascular system
      10. Lymphatic system
      11. Eyes and ears
    10. Mental Health/Psychiatric Terminology
      1. Definition and spelling of mental health/psychiatric terms
      2. Signs and symptoms related to mental health & illness terminology
      3. Definition and spelling of mental illness diagnoses, signs and symptoms
      4. Introduction to, defining and spelling of terminology associated with occupational therapy intervention methods
    11. Occupational Therapy Terminology
      1. Definition and spelling of occupational therapy practice framework terminology
      2. Introduction, defining and spelling of terminology associated with occupational therapy assessment and evaluation techniques and methods
      3. Introduction to, defining and spelling of terminology associated with the motor‐praxis, sensory‐perceptual, cognitive, emotional regulation, and communication/interaction performance skills.
        1. Neuromusculoskeletal
        2. Sensory
        3. Perceptual
        4. Cognitive
      4. Introduction to, defining and spelling of occupational therapy terminology associated with occupational therapy interventions in mental health
      5. Introduction to, defining and spelling of occupational terminology associated with physical dysfunction intervention and wellness promotion
    12. Medical Abbreviations
      1. Medical abbreviations - purpose and use
      2. Interpretation of medical abbreviations incorporated into medical notes
      3. Abbreviation terminology frequently utilized by occupational therapy in documentation

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 1110 - Mental Health Conditions

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, BIOL 2710, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235

    This course provides an overview of the most common mental health conditions and disorders referred to occupational therapy. The content will explore current practice trends, definitions, etiology, incidence, pathology, goal setting, and intervention methods. Disorders will be introduced as categorized in the DSM-5. The interprofessional team involved in client intervention will be explored as well as the relationship of occupational performance to health and wellness. Literature reviews for related evidence-based and best practice will be introduced.

    Location: Center Campus

    When Offered: Fall Semester only

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 1110 are communication and best practice methods.

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to develop knowledge in the background of psychiatric conditions.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify psychiatric terminology and definition.
    2. Identify the development and use of the DSM.
    3. Identify and define stress as a factor in mental health.
    4. Identify defensive mechanisms.
    5. Identify mental health models and theories.
    6. Identify the Michigan mental health code.
    7. Understand how history & sociopolitical climates influence practice.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of a given psychiatric diagnosis including the etiology, the incidence, and the pathology.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of anxiety and related disorders
    2. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of mood disorders including depression, bipolar and related disorders
    3. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of neuro‐cognitive and related disorders
    4. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of neuro‐development disorders
    5. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of sleep‐wake, sexual dysfunction and disruptive disorders
    6. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of substance abuse
    7. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of schizophrenia spectrum and related psychotic disorders
    8. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of personality disorders
    9. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of feeding, eating and somatic disorders
    10. Identify the etiology, incidence and pathology of dissociative disorders and other disorders
    11. Identify the social, community and physical implications important to occupational performance and mental health

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the relationship of mental health and wellness to occupational performance of the individual.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the impact of symptoms/behaviors to occupational function/dysfunction
    2. Identify the role of OT/OTA in symptom and behavior management
    3. Identify the implications for occupational therapy involvement
    4. Identify the promotion of health and wellness

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the role of occupation treatment intervention and in the promotion of health and prevention of disease with mental health diagnoses.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify psychosocial OT theories and models
    2. Identify & begin application of the OT process in mental health settings/situations
    3. Identify & begin application of the role of the OTR/COTA in mental health settings/situations
    4. Identify occupation‐based problems for a given diagnosis
    5. Identify occupation‐based intervention goals for a given diagnosis
    6. Identify & begin application of the purposeful activity for the intervention of a given diagnosis in mental health settings/situations
    7. Identify the interprofessional team in mental health treatment and roles

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction
      1. Course requirements and expectations of student & competencies
      2. Best practice - identifying evidence through scholarly resources
    2. Introduction to mental health practice and issues
      1. Diagnostic categories/diagnosis DSM
      2. Medical models versus OT practice models.
      3. Influence of history, theories & sociopolitical climates.
      4. Physical conditions with mental health co‐diagnoses
    3. Occupational therapy practice
      1. Occupational therapy practice framework
      2. OT process
      3. Role delineation/communication
      4. Understanding of signs/symptoms/behaviors
    4. Stress
      1. Definition of stress
      2. Clinical picture for stress including etiology, incidence and pathology and impact to occupational function
      3. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for stress
      4. Team members and communication/collaboration
      5. Role of occupation in the promotion of health and wellness
    5. Defense Mechanisms
      1. Define defense mechanisms
      2. Normal vs abnormal use
    6. Mental Health Models
      1. Mental health models used in occupational therapy
      2. The role of occupation in the mental health models
    7. Substance Abuse and Addictive Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for substance dependency and addictive disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology; implications for function/treatment, culture and lifestyle considerations, implications for occupational therapy
      2. Occupation based treatment goals
      3. Interprofessional team
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    8. Schizophrenia Spectrum/Psychotic Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for schizophrenia including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Types of schizophrenia on spectrum
      3. Interprofessional team
      4. Appropriate occupation‐based therapy goals for schizophrenia
      5. The role of occupation in the promotion of health and wellness
    9. Feeding and Eating Disorders
      1. Clinical picture of disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals
      3. The role of occupation in the promotion of health and wellness
    10. Anxiety/OCD and Trauma related Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for anxiety and panic disorders
      3. Team members
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    11. Bipolar/Depression and related Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for bipolar disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Team members
      3. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for bipolar disorders
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    12. Personality Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for personality disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for personality disorders
      3. Interprofessional team
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of health and wellness
    13. Dissociative Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for dissociative disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for dissociative disorders
      3. Team members
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    14. Neuro‐cognitive Disorders
      1. Clinical picture for organic mental disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals appropriate for organic mental disorders
      3. Team members
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    15. Mood Disorders ‐ Depressive, Bipolar and related disorders
      1. Clinical picture for mood disorders including etiology, incidence, and pathology
      2. Occupation‐based therapy goals
      3. Team members
      4. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    16. Neurodevelopmental Disorders
      1. Mental health diagnoses pertaining to children and adolescents
      2. Clinical picture for disorders of children and adolescence
      3. Occupation‐based therapy goals
      4. Interprofessional team
      5. The role of occupation in the promotion of wellness
    17. Role of Psychiatric Personnel (Team Members)
      1. Team members:
        1. Music therapists
        2. Art therapists
        3. Therapeutic recreation specialists
        4. Pharmacologists/pharmacists
        5. Vocational rehab counselor
        6. Psychologists
        7. Medical specialists
        8. Nurse
        9. Social worker
        10. Nutritionist
        11. Psychiatrist
      2. Descriptions of each team member’s role
    18. Michigan Mental Health Code
      1. Parameters of practice for Occupational Therapists/COTA’s

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1210 - Clinical Kinesiology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, BIOL 2710, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235

    This course studies functional human musculoskeletal movement and its interrelationship to the neuromuscular system as a foundation to the basic understanding of normal and abnormal movements. This course guides the student through the skill of analyzing occupation-based movement and the application of biomechanical principles to functional performance.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the basic concepts of joint motion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the planes and axes and their relationship to joint motion.
    2. Identify the motions, which occur in each plane.
    3. Identify and use the proper anatomical terms of reference.
    4. Describe the difference between open and closed kinematic chains and identify examples of occupation‐based closed and opened chained movements.
    5. Describe degrees of freedom and the relationship to joint motion.
    6. Describe diarthrodial joints and their characteristics.
    7. Define and describe oosteokinematics versus arthrokinematics.
    8. Describe convex/concave relationship in arthrokinematics.
    9. Apply knowledge to functional activities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the forces that produce human motion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and describe the classes of levers and their function in the human body.
    2. Describe forces as vectors and how they affect motion/muscle torque in the human body.
    3. Define muscle torque and how it creates human joint motion.
    4. Define movement of arms and their clinical relevance.
    5. Identify the center of gravity of the body and the effects of gravity on the body.
    6. Describe biomechanical principles of force systems to body equilibrium, joint function, motion and therapeutic situation.
    7. Describe the lever system and discuss its application to the musculoskeletal system.
    8. Identify the principles of stability and the relationship to gravity to base of support.
    9. Identify the relationship of functional body mechanics to human movement, problem prevention and the role of occupation.
    10. Apply knowledge to function/occupation‐based activities.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the basic concepts of muscle function.

    Objectives:

    1. Define origin and insertion of muscle, tendon, ligament, and joint capsule.
    2. Identify the characteristics of skeletal muscle.
    3. Identify muscle fiber arrangements and the relationship to function.
    4. Identify three types of muscle contractions.
    5. Identify agonist and antagonist.
    6. Describe muscle excitation and contraction.
    7. Describe the relationship between nerve and muscle function.
    8. Describe the length‐tension relationship of muscle and how active/passive insufficiency is utilized for normal movement.
    9. Identify the relationship of the principles of manual muscle testing to muscle function.
    10. Identify the role of the OTR/COTA in manual muscle testing.
    11. Apply knowledge to function/occupation‐based activities.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of muscle function and the relationship to occupational based performance by anatomical structure and muscle groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the face and head.
    2. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the shoulder girdle and shoulder.
    3. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the elbow, wrist and hand.
    4. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the thorax.
    5. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the spine and trunk.
    6. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the pelvic girdle and hip.
    7. Identify the major anatomical structures, nerve innervations and muscle function of the knee, ankle and foot.
    8. Identify and describe gait and the relationship to occupational performance.
    9. Apply knowledge to function/occupation‐based activities.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Kinematics
      1. Definition of kinesiology
      2. Kinematics
        1. Osteokinematics
        2. Arthrokinematics
      3. Planar classification of position and motion
      4. Open and closed occupation‐based kinematic chains
      5. Convex/concave relationship in arthrokinematics versus osteokinematics
      6. Classification of joint movement
      7. Joint nutrition and lubrication
      8. Pathology and clinical considerations
    2. Kinetics ‐ Biomechanics
      1. Static biomechanics: basic principles
        1. Axes of rotation
        2. Force
        3. Center of gravity
        4. Lever arm and muscle attachments
        5. Movement arm
        6. Torque
      2. Dynamic motion
        1. Lever systems
        2. Effects of lever lengths
        3. Torque and angle of pull
      3. Gravity
        1. Center of gravity ‐ human body (posture)
        2. Principles of stability
        3. Body mechanics and effects of lever lengths
        4. Center of gravity as it relates to changing body positions
      4. Forces occurring between articular surfaces
      5. Effects of abnormal body mechanics
    3. Muscle Function
      1. Characteristics of muscle
      2. Structure of muscle
      3. Muscle fiber arrangement and function
      4. Actions/function of muscle
      5. Physiological mechanism of muscle contraction
      6. Principles of manual muscle testing
    4. Face and Head
      1. Temporomandibular joint
        1. Osteokinematics
        2. Anatomy ‐ skeletal and disc
        3. Capsule and ligaments
        4. Muscles
        5. Arthrokinematics
        6. Muscle group action
      2. Facial muscles and action
      3. Cranial nerve III and VII
    5. Shoulder Girdle and Shoulder
      1. Shoulder complex ‐ composition
      2. Glenohumeral joint
        1. Motions
        2. Skeletal anatomy, ligaments and capsule
        3. Muscles
        4. Joint stabilization
      3. Sternoclavicular joint
      4. Acromioclavicular joint
      5. Scapulo thoracic joint
        1. Motions
        2. Skeletal anatomy
        3. Muscles
        4. Scapulohumeral rhythm
      6. Shoulder motion relationship to multi‐joint muscles of elbow
    6. Elbow, Wrist and Hand
      1. Elbow joint
        1. Skeletal anatomy
        2. Ligaments
        3. Motions and muscles
        4. Arthrokinematics
      2. Forearm joints
        1. Skeletal anatomy
        2. Ligaments
        3. Actions and muscles
        4. Arthrokinematics
      3. Relationships of multi‐joint muscles to elbow and wrist
      4. Wrist complex
        1. Skeletal anatomy
        2. Joints and ROM
        3. Ligaments
        4. Muscles and actions
        5. Arthrokinematics
      5. Hand complex
        1. Joints
        2. Skeletal anatomy
        3. Ligaments
        4. Motion and ROM
        5. Arthrokinematics
        6. Muscles and actions
        7. Relationship of active and passive insufficiency to wrist motion
      6. Brachial plexus and nerve innervation to upper extremity muscles
    7. Thorax
      1. Anatomical skeletal framework of thorax
      2. Joints
      3. Movements
      4. Muscle actions
      5. Respiration
        1. Anatomical relationship
        2. Muscle actions
    8. Spine and Trunk
      1. Vertebral column ‐ regions and curves
        1. Regions and curves
        2. Skeletal structure and disc
        3. Joints and motion
      2. Ligaments
      3. Joint biomechanics
      4. Structure and function
      5. Muscle and actions
    9. Pelvic Girdle and Hip
      1. Hip joint‐structure and function
      2. Anatomical structure
        1. Pelvis
        2. Hip joint
      3. Abnormal angulations of femur
      4. Ligaments
      5. Muscle, action and function
      6. Pelvic and femoral motions
      7. Arthrokinematics
      8. Lumbosacral plexus
    10. Knee, Ankle and Foot
      1. Knee
        1. Joints ‐skeletal anatomy and meniscus
        2. Ligaments
        3. Motions, muscle and function
        4. Arthrokinematics
        5. Abnormal postures
      2. Talocrural joint
        1. Skeletal anatomy
        2. Ligaments
        3. Motions and muscles
        4. Arthrokinematics
        5. Abnormal postures
      3. Foot
        1. Joints
        2. Skeletal anatomy
        3. Ligaments
        4. Motions and muscles
        5. Arthrokinematics
        6. Abnormal postures
    11. Gait
      1. Basic concepts of gait
      2. Center of gravity
      3. Gait cycle and phases
      4. Basic determinants of gait
      5. Critical events
      6. Critical muscle activity

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1230 - Introduction to Physical Rehabilitation Lab

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, BIOL 2710, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, and OTAS 1235

    This course introduces the student to basic clinical protocols and competency skills required of the occupational therapy assistant in physical dysfunction settings. The skills introduced will provide the basis for further skill development in progression of competencies that are standard to the profession of occupational therapy. The course is lab/competency based and will provide student instruction through a variety of learning experiences.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 1230 are professional accountability and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    Outcome 1: Apply screening and evaluation as they relate to occupational performance and participation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the purpose, describe application, and demonstrate biomechanical principles as they relate to human body motion and occupation-based performance.
    2. Explain the purpose, describe the application, and demonstrate basic body mechanics for clinician and client.
    3. Explain the purpose, describe the application, and demonstrate basics of functional range of motion (ROM), including
      1. Active range of motion (AROM)
      2. Passive range of motion (PROM)
      3. Active assistive range of motion (AAROM)
      4. Self range of motion
      5. Demonstrate a simulation of wellness groups through OT leadership.
    4. Explain the purpose, describe the evaluation process, demonstrate basic use of goniometry tools, and document findings accurately.
    5. Explain the purpose, describe the evaluation process, demonstrate basics of functional manual muscle testing, and document findings accurately.
    6. Explain the purpose, describe the evaluation process, demonstrate basic use of pinch gauge and dynamometer, and document findings accurately.
    7. Explain the purpose, describe, and demonstrate basic strengthening interventions.

    Outcome 2: Screen and evaluate functional mobility required in the environment and needed for occupational performance and participation.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate safe operation and application of the various types of wheelchairs.
    2. Demonstrate safe operation and application of the various types of walkers.
    3. Demonstrate safe operation and application of the various types of canes.

    Outcome 3: Demonstrating safe transfer techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate safe physical transfers with clients from various surfaces utilizing standing pivot, modified standing pivot, modified bent pivot, sliding board, and total dependent and mechanical lift.
    2. Demonstrate safe physical transfers with clients in/out of bath tub, toilet, and commode.

    Outcome 4: Applying various activities of daily living, specifically dressing, bathing, and the use of assistive devices for occupational performance and participation.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate different methods of safe instruction based on client-specific needs.
    2. Explain the purpose, describe the application, and demonstrate the use of upper extremity dressing and bathing devices.
    3. Explain the purpose, describe the application, and demonstrate the use of lower extremity dressing and bathing devices.
    4. Explain the purpose and demonstrate the use of assistive devices and adaptive techniques for upper and lower extremity dressing and bathing.

    Outcome 5: Explain the concept, use, and value of standard precautions and transmission based precautions.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and apply methods of infection control, universal precautions, and isolation techniques for safety throughout the treatment process.

    Outcome 6: Explain the rationale for the need to measure, monitor, and record a client’s vital signs.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe, define and accurately measure/record a client’s blood pressure, pulse and heart rates, respiration rate, and determine a client’s sense of pain.
    2. Describe the expected normal and abnormal changes in blood pressure, heart rate and respiration rate resulting from exercise/occupation-based activities.
    3. Explain to a client or caregiver the significance of measuring and monitoring vital signs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Anatomy Terminology
      1. Major body zones
      2. Cardinal planes
      3. Degrees of freedom
      4. Bones and joints
      5. Body movements
    2. Range of Motion (ROM)
      1. Principles
      2. Types of ROM
        1. PROM
        2. AROM
        3. AAROM
        4. Self ROM
    3. ROM Measurement and Movement
      1. Styles of goniometers
      2. Screening and evaluation for measuring all joints of the upper extremity
      3. Individual and group intervention
      4. Application to occupational performance and participation
    4. Muscle Testing and Strengthening
      1. Muscle grades
      2. Manual muscle testing
      3. Functional muscle testing
      4. Grip and pinch testing
      5. Types of strengthening exercises
      6. Steps in grading resistive activities/exercises
      7. Resistive activities/exercises appropriate for muscle grades
      8. Application to occupational performance and participation
    5. Functional Mobility and Moving Safely in the Environment
      1. Wheelchair introduction/sensitivity activity
      2. Types of wheelchairs
      3. Wheelchair parts, operation, and adjustment
      4. Environmental barriers for wheelchairs
      5. Modifications needed to eliminate barriers
      6. Types of walkers and demonstration of use/adjustment
      7. Types of canes and demonstration of use/adjustment
      8. Other functional mobility devices
      9. Application to occupational performance and participation
    6. Transfer Training and Technique
      1. Bed mobility
      2. Standing pivot
      3. Modified bent pivot
      4. Sliding board
      5. Dependent
      6. Mechanical lifts
      7. Toilet
      8. Tub
    7. Activities of Daily Living (ADL)
      1. Best Practice Methods of instruction
        1. Strategies incorporated to client factors, context, performance patterns, performance skills, and occupational profile
          1. Verbal instruction
          2. Kinesthetic instruction
          3. Demonstration
      2. Specific techniques
        1. Dressing/undressing upper body
          1. Onehanded technique
          2. Compensatory techniques
          3. Hip precautions
        2. Dressing/undressing lower body
          1. Onehanded technique
          2. Compensatory techniques
          3. Hip precautions
        3. Bathing body parts
          1. Onehanded technique
          2. Compensatory techniques
          3. Hip precautions
    8. Assistive Devices for Dressing/Bathing/Transfers
      1. Reacher
      2. Dressing stick
      3. Sock aid
      4. Long handled shoe horn
      5. Long handled bath sponge
      6. Button hook
      7. Shoe tying
      8. Tub bench/shower chair
      9. Long handled shower hose
      10. Toilet railings
      11. Raised toilet seat
      12. Sliding board
    9. Standard Precautions
      1. Barriers for protection against bodily fluids
      2. Hand hygiene
      3. Sharps/needles
      4. Soiled client care equipment
      5. Miscellaneous
    10. Transmission Based Precautions
      1. Isolation precautions
        1. Contact precautions
        2. Droplet precautions
        3. Airborne precautions
    11. Assessment of Vital Signs
      1. Pulse
      2. Blood Pressure
      3. Heart Rate
      4. Respiration Rate
      5. Oxygen Saturation Rate
      6. Pain

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1235 - Human Development & Clinical Interaction Occupational Therapy Practice

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; HHSC 1030, PHIL 2100, BIOL 2710, and PSYC 1010 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, and OTAS 1230

    This course provides the student with the knowledge required in life span development, emphasizing relationships to occupational performance, culture, social contexts, and communication as they correlate to physical, sensorimotor, cognitive, and psychosocial development. Theories and research on human development and the impact of choice, or imposed environment, including global issues impacting development and access to services, will be addressed. The impact of therapeutic communication at different stages of development, the impact of culture and generational learning styles, and teaching techniques will be addressed.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Articulation of stages of human development and the relationship to occupational performance.
      1. Articulate the major theories of development and associated research.
      2. Articulate the physical and sensorimotor development in the stages of human development.
      3. Articulate the cognitive development in the stages of human development.
      4. Articulate the psychosocial development in the stages of human development.
      5. Articulate the relationship of development tasks of lifespan stages and occupational performance.
      6. Articulate the role of occupational therapy across the lifespan.
    2. Explaining the relationship of human development to behavior, social environment, and occupational choices.
      1. Define and articulate factors that influence and impact human development and occupational performance, including global issues of social injustice, occupational deprivation, societal changes and disparity of health care services.
      2. Articulate the factors of prevailing and welfare needs of populations and the factors influencing those at risk for disability and chronic conditions.
      3. Articulate the impact of family on development and occupational performance.
      4. Articulate the relationship of cultural diversity to human development.
      5. Articulate the relationship of religion and spirituality throughout the lifespan.
      6. Articulate the relationship and impact of social context in human development.
      7. Articulate the relationship of socioeconomic factors to human development and occupational performance.
      8. Articulate the factors of diversity and lifestyle choices that impact human development and occupational performance.
      9. Articulate the impact of context to the choices in occupational performance.
      10. Articulate the factors of prevailing health and welfare needs of populations.
      11. Articulate the factors of populations at risk for disability and chronic conditions.
    3. Articulating the relationship of communication in human development, the impact to occupational performance and occupational therapy intervention.
      1. Articulate the relationship of communication in human development.
      2. Articulate the impact of culture on communication behavior and bias.
      3. Articulate the difference in communication styles required by practitioners with the different stages of development.
      4. Articulate and demonstrate the variety of teaching techniques required by practitioners for the different lifespan stages.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Course Introduction
      1. Explore and define the impact of lifespan development on occupational therapy intervention
      2. Explore and define developmental tasks in human development
      3. Explore and define physical and sensorimotor development
      4. Explore and define cognitive development
      5. Explore and define psychosocial development
        1. Personality
        2. Social
        3. Mental health and wellness
      6. Explore and define the other influences that impact human development
        1. Global issues, including social injustice, occupational deprivation and disparity of services
        2. Societal changes
        3. Prevailing health and welfare needs of populations
        4. Populations at risk for disabilities and chronic health conditions
      7. Explore and define theories and research in human development
    2. Development of Newborns and Infants
      1. Stages of prenatal development
      2. The birth process and cultural influences
      3. Development of infants
        1. Stages of infancy
          1. Physical and sensorimotor
          2. Cognitive
          3. Psychosocial
        2. Developmental tasks
        3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact infant role within the family
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners with parents and caregivers
    3. Development in Early Childhood
      1. Development of children
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact early childhood roles within the family
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners for early childhood clients, parents, and caregivers
    4. Development in Middle Childhood
      1. Development of children in middle childhood
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact the adolescent role within the family
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners’ clients, parents, and caregivers
    5. Development in Adolescence
      1. Development of adolescence
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact the adolescence
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental task
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners’ clients, parents, and caregivers
    6. Stages of Early Adulthood Development
      1. Development of early adulthood
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact early adulthood
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners’ clients, parents, and caregivers
    7. Stages of Middle Adulthood Development
      1. Development of middle adulthood
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact middle adulthood
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners’ clients, parents, and caregivers
    8. Stages of Late Adulthood Development
      1. Development of late adulthood
        1. Physical and sensorimotor
        2. Cognitive
        3. Psychosocial
        4. Communication
      2. Developmental tasks and roles
      3. Occupational performance and participation
      4. Cultural influences that impact late adulthood
      5. Social and environmental influences on developmental tasks
      6. Communication and teaching techniques required by practitioners’ clients, parents, and caregivers
    9. Final Stages in Lifespan Development
      1. Death and dying issues related to lifespan development and roles in life
      2. Stages of death and dying
      3. Social implications of end of life options and choices
      4. Impact to communication with client, family and community
      5. Communications surrounding the client, family and community with the final stage of human development

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 1300 - Rehabilitation Conditions & Intervention Planning Lecture

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401,and OTAS 1420

    This course provides the student with a working knowledge of the conditions in physical dysfunction commonly referred to occupational therapy. In addition to the introduction of disease etiology, incidences, and pathology, the course will emphasize the development of clinical reasoning skills for basic intervention planning and wellness promotion. The occupational therapy process will be highlighted towards restoring, remediating, or compensating the dysfunction of occupational performance and the impact to the physical and psychosocial aspects of individuals. The student will be introduced to common intervention methods used with rehabilitation conditions seen in the practice of occupational therapy.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 1300 are communication, clinical reasoning and best practice methods.

    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Explain a given rehabilitation diagnosis including etiology, incidence, signs and symptoms, prognosis, precautions and medical treatment.
      1. Articulate the effects of inheritable and genetic conditions, disability, trauma and injury to the physical, psychosocial and occupational performance of the individual.
      2. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding cardiopulmonary conditions.
      3. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding general medicine conditions.
      4. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding neurological conditions.
      5. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding musculoskeletal conditions.
      6. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding orthopedic conditions.
      7. Articulate pertinent medical information regarding upper extremity conditions.
      8. Articulate the categorization of conditions as acute, chronic or terminal and the effects on occupational performance.
      9. Articulate the levels of care, transition of levels and the impact to intervention planning and implementation.
    2. Apply a variety of occupational therapy intervention activities and methods with intervention planning for physical rehabilitation conditions.
      1. Articulate and demonstrate a variety of occupational therapy intervention methods.
        1. Assistive devices
        2. Compensatory techniques
        3. Joint protection
        4. Energy conservation
        5. Work simplification
        6. Ergonomics
        7. Physical agent modalities (competencies)
      2. Recognize, demonstrate and articulate basic and complete socio-economical concerns with assistive device intervention.
      3. Recognize and articulate psychosocial concerns of individuals with rehabilitation intervention.
      4. Recognize and articulate the interprofessional team approach to rehabilitation intervention.
      5. The use of professional literature to make evidence based decisions for occupation therapy intervention.
    3. Analysis of case studies of occupation-based evaluation, intervention planning and outcomes with occupational therapy intervention of rehabilitation conditions utilizing clinical reasoning skills.
      1. Articulate and apply the OT process to a variety of case studies.
      2. Articulate the role of occupation in the promotion of health, prevention and disability for the individual, family and society.
      3. Articulate the importance of balancing areas of occupation with achievement of health and wellness.
      4. Articulate and apply information pertinent to the occupational profile.
      5. Articulate and apply basic components of assessment and measures of function.
      6. Analyze dysfunction in performance areas through an analysis of performance skill, patterns, client factors and activity demands, including the physical and mental health impact.
      7. Analyze intervention methods appropriate for the performance dysfunction.
      8. Articulate the relationship in the level of care to the intervention methods and duration.
      9. Explain prioritizing intervention needs dictated by client factors and setting goals.
      10. Explain the impact of client context in activity selection.
      11. Identify when to recommend the need for referring clients for additional services.
      12. Explain discharge planning.
      13. Explain the promotion of wellness with rehabilitation conditions.
      14. Explain the roles, and communication between the OT and OTA in the occupational therapy process.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Course Introduction
      1. Review of course terminology
      2. Role of occupational therapy intervention with physical dysfunction clients
        1. Levels of care and purpose
      3. Role delineation of OTA and OT in clinical practice with physical dysfunction, including evaluation and screening
      4. Categories of physical dysfunction/rehabilitation conditions
        1. Cardiopulmonary
        2. General medicine
        3. Musculoskeletal
        4. Neurological
        5. Orthopedic
        6. Upper extremity
    2. Clinical Reasoning for Intervention Planning
      1. The role of occupation in promotion for the individual, family and society
        1. Health
        2. Prevention
        3. Disability
      2. The importance of occupational balance in health and wellness achievement
      3. Occupational therapy practice framework
      4. Occupational therapy process
      5. Evaluation process
        1. Occupational profile - client factors, performance skills, performance patterns, context and environment
        2. Occupational analysis client factors, performance skills, performance patterns, context and environment
      6. Evidence‐based intervention
      7. Intervention planning
        1. Identification of occupation‐based problems
        2. Identification of client goals
        3. Identification of intervention time frame
        4. Selection of intervention activities based on evidence/best practice from professional literature
        5. Identification of discharge plan
      8. Referral for additional evaluation and other disciplines
    3. Common Occupational Therapy Intervention Methods and Strategies
      1. Principles of use and application of methods and strategies
      2. Interprofessional team approaches
      3. Role of OTA
      4. Assistive devices
        1. Recognize and articulate socio‐economic concerns with intervention with assistive devices and equipment needs
      5. Compensatory techniques
      6. Joint protection
      7. Energy conservation/work simplification
      8. Ergonomics
      9. Physical agent modalities and competencies
        1. Hot/cold packs
        2. Paraffin
        3. Fluidotherapy
        4. Ultrasound
        5. E‐stim and TNS
    4. Cardiopulmonary Conditions
      1. Pulmonary conditions
        1. COPD
        2. Asthma
        3. Pulmonary hypertension
          1. Clinical picture
          2. Precautions
          3. Interprofessional team members and roles
      2. Cardiac conditions
        1. Clinical picture
        2. Precautions
        3. Interprofessional team members and roles
      3. Occupation‐based intervention planning
    5. General Medicine Conditions
      1. Clinical pictures, precautions and interprofessional team member roles
        1. Autoimmune disorders
          1. Myasthenia gravis
          2. HIV
          3. Lupus
            1. Systemic
            2. Erythematosis
        2. Oncology
        3. Renal disease
        4. Diabetes mellitus
        5. Fibromyalgia f. Myasthenia gravis
        6. Gullain‐Barre Syndrome
        7. Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS)
        8. Post Polio Syndrome
      2. Occupation‐based intervention planning
    6. Neurological Conditions
      1. Clinical pictures, precautions and interprofessional team member roles
        1. Multiple Sclerosis (MS)
        2. Parkinson’s Disease
        3. Spinal cord injury
        4. Cerebral Vascular Accident (CVA)
        5. Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI)
        6. Nerve injury disorders
          1. Peripheral nerve
          2. Brachial plexus
          3. Reflex Sympathetic Dystrophy
      2. Occupation‐based intervention planning
    7. Musculoskeletal Conditions
      1. Clinical pictures, precautions and interprofessional team member roles
        1. Rheumatoid Arthritis (RA)
        2. Juvenile Arthritis (JRA)
        3. Osteoarthritis
        4. Scleroderma
        5. Ankylosing Spondylitis (AS)
      2. Occupation‐based intervention planning
    8. Orthopedic Conditions and Upper Extremity Disorders
      1. Clinical pictures, precautions and interprofessional team member roles
        1. Amputations
        2. Fractures
        3. Hip fractures
        4. Total hip replacement
        5. Total knee replacement
        6. Cumulative trauma disorders
          1. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
          2. Rotator cuff injury
          3. Back injury
        7. Tendon injuries and disorders
          1. Dypuytren’s contractor
          2. Flexor/extensor injuries
      2. Occupation‐based intervention planning

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1351 - Pediatric Occupational Therapy Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1300, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, and OTAS 1420

    This course introduces the role and function of occupational therapy with pediatric populations and settings, including infancy, early childhood, middle childhood, adolescence, and young adulthood. This course introduces the student to physiological, cognitive, and psychosocial function commonly referred to pediatric occupational therapy practice. Evidence‑based evaluation and screening, and intervention planning for dysfunction and health promotion are emphasized throughout the occupational therapy process and within the scope of practice for the occupational therapy assistant. The significance of utilizing a family‑centered approach in the intervention of pediatric populations is emphasized.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads, or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 1351 are communication and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Utilization of the occupational therapy process in pediatrics and the relationship to occupational performance and participation for pediatric populations.
      1. Articulate basic features of pediatric occupational therapy models of practice.
      2. Articulate features of models of practice and frames of reference utilized in pediatric occupational therapy.
      3. Identify work settings and workforce trends in pediatric occupational therapy.
      4. Describe the impact of federal and state regulatory policies.
      5. Describe the medical, educational, and community systems of occupational therapy practice and their impact on occupational performance and participation.
      6. Define and apply evidence-based practice as it relates to occupational therapy evaluation and screening, and intervention with pediatric clients.
      7. Articulate communication methods for the occupational therapy assistant with the occupational therapist, parents, teachers, caregivers and other professionals.
    2. Consider and contrast the effects of pediatric health conditions and disease processes, genetic conditions, disability, trauma, and injury to the physical, mental health and occupational performance of pediatric clients.
      1. Explain definitions, etiologies, incidences, signs and symptoms of intellectual disabilities, genetic conditions, orthopedic and neurological conditions, sensory systems impairments, environmentally induced and acquired conditions, mental health conditions, and health and wellness promotion.
      2. Articulate and recognize occupational therapy evaluation instruments and occupational therapy intervention methods.
    3. Comprehend and distinguish the roles of the OT and OTA in pediatrics, emphasizing responsibilities of the OTA during treatment intervention that will promote wellness, restore, maintain, and/or modify best practice occupational performance.
      1. Comprehend the collaborative process between the occupational therapy practitioner and caregivers that will promote a client-centered approach.
      2. Distinguish and demonstrate the role of the OT/OTA when practicing under a medical model.
      3. Distinguish and demonstrate the role of the OT/OTA when practicing under an educational model.
      4. Describe interprofessional team members in a medical model and identify their roles.
      5. Describe interprofessional team members in an educational model and identify their roles.
      6. Describe interprofessional team members in a community model and identify their roles.
      7. Describe communication with interprofessional teams.
      8. Identify emerging areas of practice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Models of Practice
      1. Model of Human Occupation (MOHO)
      2. Canadian Occupational Performance Model
      3. Person‐Environment‐Occupation Model
    2. Frames of Reference
      1. Developmental
      2. Biomechanical
      3. Sensory integration
      4. Motor control
      5. Neuro‐developmental
      6. Model of Human Occupation
      7. Rehabilitation
      8. Skill acquisition
      9. Cognitive‐Behavioral Therapy
      10. Behavior modification
      11. Psychoeducational Group Therapy
      12. Applied behavioral analysis
    3. Occupational Therapy Process
      1. Evaluation
        1. Occupational profile
        2. Occupational analysis
      2. Intervention
        1. Planning
        2. Implementation
        3. Re‐evaluation
      3. Outcomes
    4. Work Settings and Work Force Trends
      1. Work settings
        1. Hospital
        2. Clinic
        3. School
        4. Home
        5. Community
        6. Emerging areas of practice
      2. Work force trends
        1. Neonates
        2. Innovation and technology
        3. Research
    5. Practice Settings
      1. Medical system
      2. School system
      3. Community system
    6. Pediatric Conditions
      1. Elements of diagnosis and dysfunction
        1. Definition
        2. Etiology
        3. Incidence
        4. Signs and symptoms
        5. Occupational therapy evaluation instruments
        6. Occupational therapy intervention methods
        7. Evidence‐based practice application
      2. Intellectual disabilities
        1. Measurements and classifications
        2. Functional implications
          1. Mental function
          2. Language function
          3. Behavior/emotional function
          4. Sensory function
          5. Movement‐related function
          6. System functions
      3. Genetic conditions
        1. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy
        2. Down Syndrome
        3. Angelman’s Syndrome
        4. Prader‐Willi Syndrome
        5. Rhett Syndrome
        6. Fragile X Syndrome
      4. Neurological conditions
        1. Spina Bifida
        2. Shaken Baby Syndrome
        3. Erb’s Palsy
        4. Cerebral Palsy
      5. Sensory system conditions
        1. Vision and hearing impairments
      6. General sensory disorganization
        1. Fussy baby
        2. Language delay and impairments
      7. Environmentally induced and acquired conditions
        1. Failure to Thrive
        2. Fetal Alcohol Syndrome
        3. Cocaine use
        4. HIV
        5. Lead poisoning
        6. Allergies to food and chemicals
      8. Mental health disorders
        1. Autism
          1. Sensory processing
          2. Sensory diets
          3. Visual cues for communication
        2. Asperger’s Syndrome
        3. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and Attention Deficit Disorder
        4. Bullying
        5. Childhood obesity
        6. Post‐Traumatic Stress Disorder
        7. Health and health risk behaviors among teenagers
      9. Wellness and health promotion
        1. Child safety devices
        2. Public health perspective
        3. Community mental health movement
    7. Interprofessional Team Member Relationships
      1. Roles of interprofessional team members in a medical model
      2. Roles of interprofessional team members in an educational model
      3. Roles of interprofessional team members in a community system
    8. Family Systems
      1. Family systems theory
      2. Family life cycle
      3. Family ecology
      4. Effects of disabilities on families
      5. Effects of family and environment on children with disabilities
      6. Therapeutic use of self
        1. Rapport
        2. Collaboration
      7. Current issues affecting OT and families

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1361 - Pediatric Occupational Therapy Lab

    Credit Hours: 1.50
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, and OTAS 1420

    This course introduces the student to the screening, evaluation, and interventions commonly used with pediatric clients, in a variety of settings, for occupational performance and participation. The course will emphasize the skills and role of the occupational therapy assistant in medical, educational, and community models of practice. The student will explore normal development implications and applications to pediatric clients of various ages experiencing physical, cognitive, and or psychosocial dysfunction.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Comprehension and application of the occupational therapy process with a variety of pediatric populations.
      1. Articulate the differences and similarities of the medical and educational models of pediatric practice.
      2. Distinguish role delineation between the OT/OTA with pediatric practice.
      3. Describe and utilize evidence‐based intervention applied to pediatric practice.
      4. Apply knowledge of interventions developed that are culturally relevant and reflective of current occupational therapy practice based on evidence.
      5. Describe and comprehend skills of collaboration with interprofessional peers and the occupational therapy practitioner.
      6. Describe and demonstrate effective interaction for interprofessional team participation in a variety of pediatric settings.
      7. Demonstrate data gathering for the purpose of screening and evaluation.
      8. Demonstrate data gathering from skilled observations.
      9. Demonstrate the basic use of various types of pediatric assessment tools, and their data generated.
      10. Articulate the role of OT/OTA in the use of pediatric assessment tools.
    2. Comprehension and application of normal development and the application to occupational performance and participation.
      1. Articulate the principles of normal development.
      2. Articulate the characteristics of reflexes and its impact on occupational performance and participation.
      3. Demonstrate and apply knowledge in positioning and handling for a variety of pediatric needs for participation in occupation based activities.
      4. Demonstrate and apply knowledge in basic facilitation and inhibitory techniques for a variety of pediatric needs for participation in occupation based activities.
    3. Basic clinical reasoning skill with occupational therapy interventions for a variety of pediatric dysfunction settings.
      1. Demonstrate basic skill in the selection of appropriate activities to address cognitive, physical and psychosocial deficits.
      2. Demonstrate basic skill in the selection of interventions appropriate for developmental and/or chronological age levels.
      3. Demonstrate development of occupation based intervention methods, plans and strategies for client/parent/caregiver.
      4. Enable ADL performance along the pediatric age spans.
      5. Demonstrate comprehension and application of IADL along pediatric age spans.
      6. Articulate the importance of play and playfulness as a performance area and an intervention method.
      7. Apply the principles of fine motor control, including handwriting skills.
      8. Demonstrate comprehension in sensory processing principles and basic methods for the application to occupational performance and participation.
      9. Demonstrate comprehension of animal assisted intervention with a variety of pediatric clients. Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:
        1. Comprehension and application of the occupational therapy process with a variety of pediatric populations.
          1. Articulate the differences and similarities of the medical and educational models of pediatric practice.
          2. Distinguish role delineation between the OT/OTA with pediatric practice.
          3. Describe and utilize evidence‐based intervention applied to pediatric practice.
          4. Apply knowledge of interventions developed that are culturally relevant and reflective of current occupational therapy practice based on evidence.
          5. Describe and comprehend skills of collaboration with interprofessional peers and the occupational therapy practitioner.
          6. Describe and demonstrate effective interaction for interprofessional team participation in a variety of pediatric settings.
          7. Demonstrate data gathering for the purpose of screening and evaluation.
          8. Demonstrate data gathering from skilled observations.
          9. Demonstrate the basic use of various types of pediatric assessment tools, and their data generated.
          10. Articulate the role of OT/OTA in the use of pediatric assessment tools.
        2. Comprehension and application of normal development and the application to occupational performance and participation.
          1. Articulate the principles of normal development.
          2. Articulate the characteristics of reflexes and its impact on occupational performance and participation.
          3. Demonstrate and apply knowledge in positioning and handling for a variety of pediatric needs for participation in occupation based activities.
          4. Demonstrate and apply knowledge in basic facilitation and inhibitory techniques for a variety of pediatric needs for participation in occupation based activities.
        3. Basic clinical reasoning skill with occupational therapy interventions for a variety of pediatric dysfunction settings.
          1. Demonstrate basic skill in the selection of appropriate activities to address cognitive, physical and psychosocial deficits.
          2. Demonstrate basic skill in the selection of interventions appropriate for developmental and/or chronological age levels.
          3. Demonstrate development of occupation based intervention methods, plans and strategies for client/parent/caregiver.
          4. Enable ADL performance along the pediatric age spans.
          5. Demonstrate comprehension and application of IADL along pediatric age spans.
          6. Articulate the importance of play and playfulness as a performance area and an intervention method.
          7. Apply the principles of fine motor control, including handwriting skills.
          8. Demonstrate comprehension in sensory processing principles and basic methods for the application to occupational performance and participation.
          9. Demonstrate comprehension of animal assisted intervention with a variety of pediatric clients.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Intervention Models for Pediatric Occupational Therapy
      1. Medical model of practice
      2. Educational model of practice
        1. Least restrictive environment
        2. Individual educational plan (IEP)
        3. Role of occupational therapy
          1. Direct service
          2. Monitoring service
          3. Consultation services
      3. Role delineation of the OT and OTA
      4. Need for current evidence‐based intervention
      5. Intervention applied to the practice framework
      6. Interprofessional communications and collaboration
    2. Assessment Tools and Processes
      1. Purposes of gathering data
        1. Screening and evaluation
        2. Observation skills
        3. Standardized assessments
        4. Application purposes of measurable data gathered
      2. Types of assessments
        1. Assessments of development
        2. Gross motor development
        3. Fine motor and perceptual
        4. Sensory processing
      3. Role of OT and OTA
    3. Normal Development and Gaining Occupational Skills
      1. Infancy, early childhood, middle childhood, and adolescence
        1. Motor development
        2. Process/cognition development
        3. Communication and interaction/psychosocial development
      2. Principles and characteristics
        1. Reflexes and reactions
          1. Rooting
          2. Sucking and swallowing
          3. Moro
          4. Palmar grasp
          5. Plantar grasp
          6. Asymmetrical tonic neck reflex
          7. Symmetrical tonic neck reflex
          8. Righting reactions
          9. Equilibrium reactions
          10. Protective extension reactions
      3. Cultural implications of development
      4. Observations and applications in CNS development
      5. Applications to dysfunction across pediatric age spans
    4. Positioning and handling
      1. Definitions and purpose
        1. Skeletal alignment
        2. Typical development
        3. Perception and body awareness
      2. Principles
      3. Indicators for use
      4. Applications to dysfunction
      5. Applications to occupational performance and participation
        1. Prone position
        2. Supine position
        3. Prone on elbow and prone on extended arms position
        4. Side‐lying
        5. Sitting position
        6. Mobility
          1. Wheelchairs
        7. Standing position
      6. Facilitatory techniques
      7. Inhibition techniques
    5. Interventions
      1. Evidence‐based intervention
      2. Selecting activity and intervention methods
        1. Chronological versus developmental age
      3. Working with parents and caregivers
        1. Communication strategies
        2. Teaching strategies
      4. ADL intervention strategies
        1. Feeding and eating skills
          1. Oral motor development
          2. Eating and swallowing
          3. Training of others in precautions and techniques, including assistive devices and preparatory techniques
        2. Dressing and undressing
          1. Age appropriate skills
        3. Personal hygiene and grooming
        4. Bathing and showering
        5. Toilet hygiene
        6. Functional mobility
        7. Sexual activity
        8. Strategies and teaching child and caregiver/parent
      5. IADL
        1. Cognitive and executive functioning
        2. Age appropriate readiness skills
          1. Home management
          2. Community mobility
          3. Care of others
          4. Communication
          5. Financial management, shopping and care of pets
          6. Safety procedures and emergency responses
        3. Strategies and teaching child and caregiver/parent
      6. Education
        1. Readiness skills
          1. Kindergarten
          2. Elementary school
          3. Middle childhood and adolescence
      7. Play and playfulness/leisure
        1. Skill acquisition
          1. Infancy
          2. Early childhood
          3. Middle childhood
          4. Adolescence
        2. Play as an occupation
        3. Play as an intervention method
        4. Age appropriate interventions
        5. Skills of the practitioner
      8. Fine motor skills
        1. Developmental sequence
          1. Bilateral control
          2. Reaching, grasping, releasing and fine motor development
          3. Object manipulation
          4. Implement usage skills
            1. Progression of implement usage
        2. Application to handwriting skills
          1. Prewriting
          2. Grasp patterns
          3. Writing readiness
          4. Evaluation and assessment
          5. Classroom observation
          6. Interventions
      9. Sensory processing/integration
        1. Screening and assessment
        2. Sensory modulation disorder
        3. Sensory‐based movement disorder
        4. Intervention strategies
      10. Animal assisted services
        1. Definition and purposes
        2. Hippotherapy
        3. Small animals
        4. Large animals
        5. Incorporating animals into pediatric practice

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 1370 - Therapeutic & Psychosocial Intervention Lab

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1401, and OTAS 1420

    This course is lab‑based with a lecture component designed to instruct the student in various skills required for intervention with clients across the lifespan experiencing psychosocial dysfunction. The course will emphasize therapeutic use of self, response to symptoms, group dynamics, leadership styles, group and individual planning and development, and the application of practice models and frames of references. This course emphasizes the development of clinical reasoning skills. The student will be required to develop and document an evidenced‑based group intervention protocol as well as a discharge plan promoting wellness.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Articulating the contexts and environments of psychosocial intervention, including those of physical dysfunction.
      1. Articulate the history and trends of OT intervention.
      2. Explain and describe the types of psychosocial settings, traditional and emerging practice.
      3. Identify and explain the variety of clients seen by OT for psychosocial intervention.
      4. Articulate knowledge for the need of interprofessional team approaches.
    2. Articulation and application of the occupational therapy intervention process as it relates to psychosocial wellness promotion, occupational roles and therapeutic use of self across the lifespan.
      1. Articulate and apply the OT process to psychosocial intervention.
      2. Articulate collaboration and roles of the OT and OTA.
      3. Explain the role of psychosocial assessment tools and their application.
      4. Examine various psychosocial assessments and their uses through an assessment critique.
      5. Demonstrate different approaches to a variety of clients with psychosocial interviews to generate an occupational profile.
      6. Articulate and apply therapeutic use of self in response to behavioral signs and symptoms for both individual and group interaction.
      7. Examine the implementation of group intervention based on principles of group development and group dynamics across the lifespan.
      8. Examine and articulate the use of appropriate and community programming to support performance in the client’s natural environment and participation in all contexts relevant to the client.
      9. Facilitate discharge planning for clients and caregivers as a process that includes identification of community, human and fiscal resources, recommendations and home programming.
    3. Articulation of the impact of communication in psychosocial intervention and application of therapeutic use of self‐principles and skills.
      1. Articulate and demonstrate the principles of basic therapeutic communication and the impact of culture.
      2. Articulate barriers to therapeutic communications with psychosocial intervention.
      3. Articulate and demonstrate active listening skills required with psychosocial intervention.
      4. Articulate and demonstrate the difference between professional and impersonal approaches, therapeutic use of self and limited self‐disclosure.
      5. Articulate and demonstrate the constructive feedback of behavior with clients of various ages.
      6. Articulate and demonstrate therapeutic use of self in response to behavioral signs and symptoms with both individual and group interaction.
    4. Articulating, applying and analyzing the planning, organization and the leadership skills necessary with group and individual psychosocial intervention with purposeful and occupation‐based activity.
      1. Articulate and apply intervention concepts related to occupation, health and wellness with psychosocial interaction.
      2. Articulate and apply knowledge intervention planning and strategies that are culturally relevant and based on evidence for group intervention across the lifespan.
      3. Apply the use of psychosocial frames of reference and their relationship to the occupational therapy process, occupation‐based intervention and the occupational therapy practice framework.
      4. Develop and apply occupation‐based intervention plans and strategies based with client‐centered practice.
      5. Articulate and demonstrate leadership styles in relationship to group dynamics and development.
      6. Demonstrate leadership skills that emphasize the teaching‐learning process with clients.
      7. Identify and articulate the stages of group development and dynamics.
      8. Develop and apply an evidence based group interventions protocol.
      9. Select and provide direct occupational therapy interventions and procedures to enhance safety, health and wellness, and performance in ADLs, IADLs, education, work, play, rest & sleep, leisure, and social participation.
      10. Articulate and implement intervention strategies to remediate and/or compensate for cognitive deficits that affect occupational performance.
      11. Develop and apply intervention plans and strategies for psychosocial interactions that are culturally relevant, reflective of current occupational therapy practice and available evidence.
      12. Articulate and demonstrate the implementation of group intervention based on principles of group development and group dynamics across the lifespan.
    5. Articulating and applying the factors of safety required with psychosocial interaction.
      1. Describe, obtain a familiarity and demonstrate the role of nonviolent crisis intervention in response to typical psychosocial signs, symptoms and behaviors.
      2. Articulate the safety procedures, precautions and contraindications in psychosocial settngs that include suicide, accounting for materials, and expected and unexpected behaviors of clients.
      3. Identify and articulate the responsibilities and role of the OT/OTA in the promotion and adherence of a safe environment for clients across the lifespan.
      4. Describe the implications of psychopharmacology on client function and the role of OT.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Contexts and Environment of Psychosocial Intervention
      1. History and trends
      2. Psychosocial settings
        1. Traditional
        2. Emerging practice
          1. Lifestyle re‐design
          2. Bullying
          3. Domestic violence
      3. Clients across the lifespan
        1. Psychosocial and behaviors requiring intervention
        2. Psychosocial behaviors resulting from physical dysfunction
      4. Interprofessional teams
      5. Laws and regulations
        1. Michigan Mental Health Code
        2. Application to psychosocial intervention
    2. Occupational Therapy Process
      1. Role delineation and collaboration of the OT/OTA in the OT process
      2. Application to psychosocial intervention
      3. Models of practice and frames of reference
      4. Person‐Environment‐Occupation Model (PEO)
      5. Promotion of health and wellness
        1. Occupational roles
    3. Evaluation and Data Gathering
      1. Occupational profiles
      2. Psychosocial assessments
        1. Gathering data and evidence‐based practice
        2. Researching assessments
        3. Critique of assessments
      3. Psychosocial interviews
    4. Intervention and Implementation
      1. Intervention concepts related to occupation, health and wellness
      2. Methods of intervention across the lifespan
        1. Groups
        2. Individual
      3. Planning intervention across the lifespan
        1. Protocols
        2. Individual intervention plans
      4. Implementing across the lifespan
        1. Groups
        2. Individuals
    5. Outcomes
      1. Promoting health and wellness
      2. Participation and engagement in the client’s natural environment and in relevant context.
      3. Health and wellness promotion
      4. Facilitating discharge planning
        1. The process of discharge planning and the identification of recommendations
        2. Community programming
        3. Identification of community, human and fiscal resources
        4. Home programming for the client’s natural environment
    6. Therapeutic Use of Self/Managing Difficult Behaviors
      1. The intentional relationship
      2. Barriers to client communications
        1. Different communication styles
        2. The impact of culture on communication behavior and bias
        3. Signs and symptoms
      3. Active listening skills for data gathering
      4. Difference between professional and impersonal approaches
      5. Limited self‐disclosure with intervention
      6. Transference and countertransference
      7. Constructive feedback in client‐clinician interaction/communications
      8. Responding to behavioral signs and symptoms
        1. Individually
        2. Group
    7. Planning and Organizing Group Intervention
      1. Identifying culturally relevant and evidence‐based intervention
      2. Applying psychosocial frames of reference
      3. Occupation‐based intervention planning and strategies on stated needs of clients
        1. Interventions based on:
          1. Health and wellness
          2. Performance areas
          3. Safety
          4. Cognitive performance and deficits
      4. Leadership styles and skills
      5. Teaching‐learning strategies
      6. Group dynamics and development across the lifespan
      7. Evidence‐based intervention
      8. Safety interventions
    8. Application of Clinical Reasoning
      1. Development of a group protocol
        1. Based on client needs and lifespan development and tasks
        2. Based on frames of reference
        3. Based on purposeful activities and occupation
        4. Promotes health and wellness
      2. Documentation of a group protocol
    9. Safety Issues and Concerns with Psychosocial Interventions
      1. Role of OT and OTA in the provision of a safe intervention environment
      2. Safety procedures, precautions and contraindications
      3. Suicide precautions
      4. Non‐violent crisis intervention
      5. Psychopharmacology
    10. Demonstrations in Application of:
      1. Evidence‐based group planning
      2. Group leadership
      3. Activity selection and progression
      4. Therapeutic use of self
      5. Intervention safety.
      6. Clinical reasoning follow through of protocol

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 1401 - Skills for Occupational Therapy Documentation I Lab

    Credit Hours: 1.50
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, and OTAS 1420

    This lab‑based course introduces the student to the basic concepts of documentation and note writing skills for the occupational therapy assistant. The course will explore various documentation formats, electronic medical records, AOTA guidelines, state licensure law and public health code, third‑party reimbursement guidelines and regulations, confidentiality, and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). Client case studies will be utilized to gain knowledge in OT evaluations, intervention plans, long‑ and short‑term goals/objectives, intervention notes, and discontinuation summaries. Problem Oriented Medical Record (POMR) will be introduced, and intervention note formats will be presented utilizing the OT practice framework. This course focuses on competency‑based learning and clinical reasoning for the purpose of identifying OT problems, goals, interventions, and outcomes.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Interpretation of documentation guidelines and formats.
      1. Identify and explain the purpose and types of documentation.
      2. Identify and explain the legal implications of documentation.
      3. Identify and explain third‐party payer guidelines and state regulations.
      4. Identify and explain medical record formats.
      5. Identify and explain standard medical abbreviations.
      6. Identify and explain professional terminology.
      7. Identify and apply the concept of confidentiality and HIPAA regulations, including consequences of breaching in fieldwork and as an OT practitioner.
      8. Explain the use of electronic medical record.
      9. Identify and explain how to substantiate skilled OT service.
    2. Utilization of Basic skill of OT documentation and documentation formats.
      1. Identify and apply observation to OT documentation.
      2. Identify and apply clinical reasoning to OT documentation.
      3. Identify and apply the OT practice framework to documentation.
      4. Identify and demonstrate the difference between an OT evaluation, intervention plans, intervention notes and discontinuation summaries.
      5. Identify and apply professional terminology and approved abbreviations in documentation.
      6. Identify and apply methods of correcting legal documentation.
      7. Identify, gather and utilize the components of OT evaluations.
      8. Identify and complete the components of OT intervention plans.
      9. Identify and complete the components of long‐term goals.
      10. Identify and document short‐term goals or objectives.
      11. Identify and document the components of SOAP notes.
      12. Identify and document the components of narrative notes.
      13. Identify and document the components of discontinuation summaries.
      14. Identify and explain the collaborative role of the OT/OTA in documentation.
    3. Utilization and incorporation of activity analysis and observation skills into OTA documentation.
      1. Gather and utilize client information from the medical record and the OT evaluation to demonstrate accurate documentation of client performance.
      2. Utilize observation skills in accurate documentation of performance in objective terms.
      3. Utilize activity analysis to synthesis intervention and performance data to intervention documentation.
      4. Utilize basic clinical reasoning skills to substantiate medical necessity through professional assessment and documentation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Occupational Therapy Documentation
      1. A basic skill competency of the profession
      2. Changing healthcare environment
      3. Why OT must substantiate intervention
      4. Skill versus unskilled intervention
        1. Documenting utilizing the OT practice framework
        2. Client factors affecting ability to perform occupational activities
        3. Objective and measurable documentation
    2. Documentation - Purpose and Types
      1. Types of documentation and its purpose
        1. Problem oriented medical record (POMR)
          1. Explain the history and philosophy of POMR
        2. Source oriented medical record
        3. Documentation formats
          1. Electronic medical record
          2. Flow charts
    3. Documentation Legal Basics
      1. Implication legal document
      2. Writing with a jury in mind
      3. Descriptive vs interpretive statements
      4. Correcting errors in a legal document
        1. Acceptable way to correct errors in a legal document
      5. Credentials
        1. Understand state and federal laws and regulations and the application to documentation
    4. Confidentiality
      1. Demonstrate understanding of confidentiality with medical records and information
      2. HIPAA regulations and its’ implications to documentation and the OT practitioner
    5. OT/OTA Responsibilities
      1. Differentiate between roles of OT/OTA in documentation
      2. Identify AOTA guidelines for documentation
      3. Identify basic requirements of third‐party payers
      4. Understanding third‐party payer guidelines and settings
        1. Hospitals
        2. Community agencies
        3. Residential agencies
        4. Schools
    6. Essential Elements of Guidelines
      1. Who is the audience
      2. Is it relevant
      3. Is it understandable
      4. Measurable
      5. Behavioral
      6. Achievable
    7. Problem Oriented Medical Record (POMR)
      1. SOAP notes
      2. Narrative notes
      3. Clinical reasoning process
    8. Utilizing and Incorporating Activity Analysis and Observation Skills into OT Documentation
      1. Gathering and utilizing client information from the medical record and the OT evaluation to document client performance
      2. Utilizing observation skills in accurate documentation of performance in objective terms
      3. Utilizing activity analysis to synthesis intervention and performance data to intervention documentation
      4. Utilizing basic clinical reasoning skills to substantiate medical necessity through professional assessment and documentation
    9. Writing Functional OT Goals
      1. The need for goals
      2. Elements of goal writing
      3. Beginning skill in writing functional long‐term occupational therapy goals
      4. Beginning skill in writing performance objectives/short‐term goals
        1. Instructional variable
        2. Observable behavior
        3. Measurement
        4. Proficiency
    10. Developing an Intervention Plan
      1. Basic intervention plan components
        1. Functional problem statement
          1. Bases on areas of occupational performance
      2. OT goals
      3. Methods and modalities of intervention
      4. Clinical reasoning
    11. Narrative Format
      1. Intervention notes, progress summaries and discontinuation summaries utilizing the narrative format
    12. SOAP Format
      1. Intervention notes, progress summaries and discontinuation summaries utilizing the SOAP format
    13. Skilled Services vs Non‐skilled Services
      1. Professional assessment
      2. Substantiation of services
      3. Reasonable and medically necessary intervention
    14. Professional Terminology
      1. Utilization and identification of professional terminology and approved abbreviations when completing documentation assignments
    15. Electronic Medical Record
      1. Use of computers as a documentation tool
      2. Advantages and challenges of electronic medical records

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 1420 - Professional Behaviors, Communications & Ethics Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, and OTAS 1401

    This course teaches the student with the professional behaviors, communication skills, and the application of ethics required for effective interaction in the practice of occupational therapy. This course will explore the methods and application of verbal and nonverbal communication methods with clients and families, peers and interprofessional team.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 1420 are communication and professional accountability.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Describe and demonstrate the skills of professional behaviors.
      1. Apply the developmental framework of professionalism.
      2. Apply the meaning of professionalism as it relates to behaviors, appearance, and presentation.
      3. Relate professional behavior in the practice of occupational therapy.
      4. Apply and demonstrate professional behaviors expected in the practice of occupational therapy.
      5. Explain AOTA Standards of Practice, Guidelines for Supervision and Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate basic skills in responding to communication styles, behaviors, and strategies utilized by the client, occupational therapy practitioner, and interprofessionals.
      1. Demonstrate the use of “I feel” messages during interactive communication.
      2. Demonstrate active listening feedback techniques during interactive communication.
      3. Identify therapeutic use of self in interactive communication.
      4. Demonstrate and differentiate between passive, assertive and aggressive communications.
      5. Explore and identify communication styles to be utilized with individuals at risk for potential self harm.
      6. Explain and demonstrate effective interview skills.
      7. Demonstrate the use of open ended questions during interactive communications.
    3. Describe cultural, generational, sexuality and spirituality impact on a client’s performance, context and the affects on performance patterns and communication.
      1. Define cultural, generational, sexuality, and spiritual diversity.
      2. Identify factors that influence the development of a person’s value system.
      3. Identify values and their relationship to client interaction.
      4. Explore culture, generational, sexuality, and spirituality as a determinant of behavior in communication.
      5. Explain cultural bias and personal bias.
    4. Demonstrate analysis and application current AOTA professional Code of Ethics and Standards of Practice of occupational therapy practice.
      1. Identify and interpret the current AOTA professional Code of Ethics, Standards of Practice and Guidelines for Supervision and Roles and Responsibilities during the delivery of Occupational Therapy services.
      2. Develop knowledge in order to create terminology and a foundation to address ethical dilemmas in everyday practice.
      3. Identify and distinguish ethical and moral dilemmas within the role as a student and future practitioner.
      4. Demonstrate the application of ethical practice when faced with an ethical dilemma.
      5. Articulate the variety of informal and formal systems for resolution of ethical disputes and jurisdiction.
      6. Identify and apply the process of ethical reasoning.
      7. Demonstrate the application of knowledge of ethics in everyday practice.
      8. Demonstrate the relationship of ethics and occupational therapy documentation and billing.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Definition of Professionalism
    2. Framework of Professionalism
      1. Need for professional behavior in the practice of occupational therapy
      2. Professional behavior developmental process
    3. Professionalism in Occupational Therapy
      1. Behaviors
        1. Dependability
        2. Initiative/self responsibility
        3. Empathy
        4. Cooperation/interpersonal skills/cultural competence
        5. Organization
        6. Clinical reasoning
        7. Supervisory process
        8. Verbal and para verbal communication
        9. Written communication
        10. Social media
      2. Appearance
        1. Grooming
        2. Apparel
      3. Presentation
        1. Body language
        2. Posture
    4. Professional Development Assessment
    5. Effective Communication
      1. Use of “I feel” messages during interactive communication
      2. Active listening feedback techniques during interactive communication
      3. Passive, assertive and aggressive communication
      4. Para verbal and non‐verbal communication
      5. Limited self disclosure
      6. Therapeutic use of self
      7. Proxemics
      8. Open ended questions
      9. Effective interview skills
      10. Empathy versus sympathy
      11. Documentation styles for home programs, documentation, and Interprofessional interactions and communications
    6. Conflict Management
      1. Define and demonstrate conflict management
      2. Conflict management techniques
    7. Values and Diversity as Determinants of Behavior
      1. Definition of terms values and diversity
      2. Identification of factors that influence the development of a person’s value system
      3. Values and relationship to client interaction
      4. Diversity as a determinant of behavior in communication
        1. Identify differing concepts of proxemics based upon culture as the variable
        2. Identify differing concepts of proxemics based upon generational diversity
        3. Identify differing concepts of proxemics based upon sexuality
        4. Identify differing concepts of proxemics based upon spirituality
      5. Diversity bias and personal bias
    8. Effective Interview Skills
      1. Identify the value of interviewing clients
      2. Use of open ended questions during interactive communications
    9. Assertiveness Skills
      1. Assertiveness skills during communication
      2. Therapeutic use of self in interactive communication
    10. Analysis of Occupational Therapy Ethics
    11. Interpretation of occupational Therapy Ethics
      1. Application to patient care
      2. Application to documentation and billing
      3. Application to collaboration and interprofessionals treatment
    12. Ethics in Everyday Practice and professional accountability
    13. Identification of Ethical Dilemmas
      1. In role of student
      2. In role of practitioner
    14. Application of Ethical Reasoning

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 1450 - Level 1 Fieldwork First Placement

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000, OTAS 1012, OTAS 1110, OTAS 1210, OTAS 1230, and OTAS 1235 all with grade C or better

    (formerly OTAS 1410)

    By providing supervised clinical experience, this course gives the beginning level1 student experience in basic occupational therapy interventions, particularly those in the psychosocial domain, under the guidance of a qualified fieldwork educator.

    Location: Off-site, by arrangement

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate beginning ability to integrate academic learning with clinical practice, emphasis in the psychosocial domain and its relationship to occupational performance.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ability to gather an occupational profile through a client‐centered approach including medical chart review, interviews, and clinical observation of performance.
    2. Demonstrate beginning ability to interpret information gathered via observation of the client’s occupational performance to formulate appropriate occupational therapy treatment interventions.
    3. Implement intervention methods utilizing occupation‐based activities learned in class or those used at the fieldwork site, under the supervision of the fieldwork educator.
    4. Document the observation of the client’s performance utilizing the occupational therapy practice framework through application of the occupational therapist, body of knowledge and process.
    5. Demonstrate awareness of safety issues throughout the client’s occupational performance and intervene as needed.
    6. Identify roles and functions of other interprofessional team members working with clients.
    7. Demonstrate an understanding of health literacy to include education and training of the client, caregiver, family and others for health and wellness.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Didactic Portion
      1. Introduction
        1. Course sequence, requirements, student performance expectations & competencies
      2. Universal precautions
        1. Follow universal precautions while engaged in client care
          1. Handwashing techniques
          2. Air‐borne and blood‐borne pathogens
        2. Air‐borne and blood‐borne pathogens
        3. Hepatitis B vaccinations
      3. Observation techniques
        1. Behavioral vs. interpretive
        2. Documentation techniques
        3. Communication skills
          1. Utilize observation and communication skills while engaged in client intervention
      4. Professionalism
        1. Dress code
        2. Responding to constructive criticism
        3. Michigan Mental Health Code
        4. AOTA Code of Ethics
    2. Fieldwork Portion
      1. Observation: Refers to the act of seeing, but more importantly, seeing with attention to specific elements and details so that it becomes possible to make tentative statements about what has been seen. Students will receive some guidance as to what is to be observed.
      2. Participation: Implies a shared involvement in an activity. The student must take responsibility for their learning including communication and professional accountability.
      3. Affective Domain: Evaluation of the student in the affective domain is aimed at objectively assessing those personal traits and attitudes which are viewed as essential to the growth and development of the student, not only as a practitioner but as a well‐integrated person. Traits, habits and attitudes to be considered will include:
        1. General Appearance: appropriate attire each day, appropriate footwear, present self appropriately.
        2. Dependability: attends clinicals, arrives on time, carries out assignment, follows direction accurately, accepts responsibility within capabilities.
        3. Ability to accept supervision: accepts feedback objectively, profits from suggestions, can engage on collaborative relationships, not passive-dependent, accepts guidance and feedback.
        4. Attitude: positive, realistic, willingness to accept new and different ideas.
        5. Initiative: seeks out information, assumes responsibility for learning, does not need prodding, can assume responsibility for tasks within capacity, follows through on own where appropriate.
        6. Interpersonal relationship: comfortable with clients and staff, able to initiate conversation with clients, viewed positively by others, adjusts to situations.
        7. Ability to communicate: expresses self clearly both orally and in writing, spells correctly, uses terminology appropriately, speaks with assurance.

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2095 - Technology & Environmental Intervention Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2410, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450

    This course provides the student with working knowledge in the use of technology and environmental intervention methods to support and enhance client performance, participation and well‑being. Knowledge in issues of reimbursement for the prevailing health care environment will be addressed. Basic to complex technology will be accentuated, including the principles of orthotic planning, construction, and application.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. The use of technology and environmental intervention to enhance occupational performance and foster participation and well‐being of clients.
      1. Define methods of technology and environment intervention.
        1. Articulate the difference between basic and complex technology.
        2. Articulate interprofessional members and roles.
      2. Articulate the historical perspective and the impact of major legislation, including the Americans with Disabilities Act.
      3. Articulate the clients in need of intervention.
      4. Articulate client contexts and environments that impact intervention.
      5. Articulate the occupational performance areas associated with technology and environmental intervention.
      6. Articulate the need for, and use of, compensatory strategies when desired life tasks cannot be performed.
      7. Articulate knowledge for the funding of technology and environmental devices, systems and services.
    2. Application of the occupational therapy process to technology and environmental intervention.
      1. Articulate the role of the OTA in the use of intervention.
      2. Analyze the need for occupational therapy intervention utilizing technology and environment methods/strategies when desired life tasks cannot be performed.
      3. Articulate the principles of assessment and intervention.
      4. Analyze the use of the occupational profile and occupational assessment in determining the selection of intervention.
      5. Explain recommendations to the OT for need of referrals for additional evaluation and other disciplines.
    3. Application of the principles and strategies of intervention for technology and environment intervention, including electronic aids to daily living and seating and positioning systems, used to enhance occupational performance and foster participation and well‐being.
      1. Analyze and apply environmental adaptations and processes including barrier free design with areas of occupation.
      2. Analyze and apply ergonomic principles for enhancement of occupational performance.
      3. Apply training techniques and articulate issues with enhancement of community mobility.
      4. Apply teaching techniques with compensatory strategies.
    4. Application of basic skills and analysis in the assessment, fabrication, and application, fitting and training in orthotic devices used to enhance occupational performance and participation.
      1. Articulate the difference between static, dynamic and prefabricated/ constructed splints.
      2. Analyze and articulate the conditions that warrant orthotic intervention.
      3. Articulate the assessment and planning for the application of orthotic intervention.
      4. Demonstrate construction of an upper extremity static splint.
      5. Demonstrate the application of an upper extremity static splint.
      6. Demonstrate teaching, care and scheduling of an orthotic device.
      7. Articulate the principles of prosthetic devices, both upper and lower extremity.
      8. Articulate the interprofessional team and the role delineation involved with the intervention of a prosthetic device.
      9. Articulate the assessment and planning required of prosthetic intervention.
      10. J. Articulate the application, fitting, and role of OT in the use and care of prosthetic devices.
      11. K. Demonstrate teaching methods required in prosthetic device intervention for client and caregiver.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Course Introduction
      1. Defining technology and environmental intervention
        1. Basic technology
        2. Complex technology
      2. Interprofessional members and their roles
      3. Historical perspective with the use of technology and environmental Intervention
        1. Legislative impact
        2. Americans with Disability Act
      4. Funding sources for devices, systems and services
    2. Intervention Populations
      1. Types of clients
      2. Conditions and dysfunction
      3. Client factors
      4. Client contexts and environment
      5. Performance areas
      6. Need and use of compensatory strategies for desired life tasks
    3. Clinical Reasoning Application with Assistive Technology Application
      1. Role of the OT and OTA
      2. Principles of assistive technology assessment and intervention
      3. Identifying client needs for assistive technology intervention
        1. Occupation profile and context
        2. Occupational assessment
          1. Occupational performance areas
          2. Performance skills
          3. Client factors
          4. Performance patterns
          5. Activity demands
          6. Context and environment
      4. Recommending to the OT additional referrals for evaluation
      5. Referrals to other disciplines and team members
    4. Categories of Technology and Environmental Interventions and Compensatory Strategies
      1. Splints and orthotics
        1. Conditions that warrant orthotic intervention
        2. Purpose and principles
        3. Types
          1. Static
          2. Dynamic
          3. Prefabrication and constructed
        4. Assessment and planning
        5. Construction of upper extremity splint
        6. Demonstration of splint application
        7. Strategies to teach application, care and scheduling
        8. Examples and use of lower extremity orthotics
        9. Interprofessional members and roles
      2. Functional electronic equipment
        1. Bioness - upper and lower extremity
        2. Saebo device - upper extremity
        3. Other functional electronic equipment
      3. Prosthetics - Upper and Lower Extremity
        1. Upper extremity
          1. Terminal devices
          2. Myoelectric prosthesis
          3. Intervention applications
        2. Lower extremity
          1. Pylon
          2. Computerized systems
          3. Disarticulation prosthesis
          4. Transmetatarsal prosthesis
          5. Intervention applications
      4. Personal Computer and Modifications
        1. Basic components
        2. Basic principles of adaptation
        3. Internet access
        4. Intervention applications
      5. Seating and Positioning
        1. Wheelchair measurement
        2. Guidelines for postural control and pressure management
        3. Benefits of postural control and pressure management
        4. Types of seating and position equipment
          1. Features and benefits
          2. Principles of application
          3. Interprofessional team members and referrals
        5. Intervention applications
      6. Technology through Computers and Modifications
        1. Education
        2. Work
        3. Applications
        4. Personal computers and modifications
        5. Basic components
        6. Basic principles of adaptation
        7. Internet access
        8. Intervention applications
      7. Technologies to Enable Mobility
        1. Types of wheeled mobility systems
          1. Features and controls
          2. Evaluation
          3. Principles of applications and training
        2. Issues to enhance community mobility
          1. Public transportation
          2. Community access
          3. Driver rehabilitation
      8. Driver Aids, Technology and Training
        1. Evaluation for transportation and driving
          1. Driving simulators
        2. Modification for driving
        3. Vehicle access and selection
        4. Transportation of wheelchair riders
        5. Intervention applications
        6. Driving rehabilitation resources
          1. Carlift
          2. OT‐driver off road assessment
          3. Older driver safety awareness
      9. Barrier‐free and Universal Design
        1. Assessment
        2. Intervention applications
          1. Daily life skills
          2. Leisure and social participation
          3. Classroom
          4. Work
          5. Community
      10. Ergonomics Principles
        1. Settings
          1. Home
          2. Work
          3. School
        2. Assessment
        3. Intervention applications
      11. Environmental Controls
        1. Basic and complex technology devices
          1. General purpose devices
          2. Special purpose devices
        2. Special purpose aids and devices
          1. Feeders
          2. Page turners
        3. Aids to daily living
          1. Selection and control
          2. Training
        4. Robotic aids
        5. Application interventions
      12. Augmentative and Alternative Communication Systems
        1. Disabilities affecting speech and language
        2. Types of communication
        3. Conversational needs
        4. Graphic needs
        5. Characteristics of systems
        6. Intervention applications
      13. Sensory Aids for Visual and Auditory Impairment
        1. Approaches to intervention
        2. Visual aids
          1. Magnification aids
          2. Automatic reading devices
          3. Mobility and orientation aids
          4. Auditory sensors
          5. Special purpose aids
          6. Intervention applications
        3. Auditory aids
          1. Hearing aids
          2. Phone access
          3. Alternating devices
          4. Assistive listening devices
          5. Intervention applications
      14. Telehealth
        1. Digital technologies for delivery of medical services, education and public health services
    5. Application of Principles and Strategies to Daily Living and Life Skills
      1. Promoting motivation and engagement for well‐being
      2. Applying environmental adaptations supporting performance, participation and well‐being
        1. Daily life skills
          1. Feeding
          2. Bathing
          3. Dressing
          4. Home management
          5. Electric aids
          6. Context considerations
        2. Leisure, play and social skills
          1. Adapted games and sports equipment
          2. Manipulation, grip and reaching adaptations of leisure equipment
          3. Page turners
        3. Classroom/education
          1. Educational activities
            1. Reading
            2. Writing
            3. Music
          2. Workstation adaptations
          3. Use of robotics
          4. Adhering to educational regulations and considerations
          5. Context implications
        4. Work
          1. Ergonomic applications
          2. Robotic aids of manipulation
          3. Workstation adaptations
          4. Working with employers
      3. Teaching demonstration of compensatory strategies
        1. Approaches and methods
        2. Demonstration of skill

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2350 - Productive Aging-Lab Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2410, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450

    This lab‑based course with a lecture component provides the student with application knowledge in the skills and special considerations required when working with aging clients. Physiological, cognitive, and psychosocial function will be covered with an emphasis on aging‑in‑place and productive aging. The role of occupational therapy in evidenced‑based intervention planning and follow through with discontinuation of services is analyzed. Clinical reasoning skills will be emphasized in planning intervention for dysfunction, and health promotion and wellness, while understanding the context and intervention needs of the aging population for occupational‑based performance.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2350 are communication, clinical reasoning and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Describe and analyze the physical, emotional, and social problems related to the aging process and the impact to occupational performance in the elderly.
      1. Relate the factors of environment, social and financial that influence performance and occupational roles of the aging population.
      2. Relate the challenges of the aging process and the impact to function.
      3. Relate and compare the considerations of aging in place and chronic conditions, including physical, psychosocial and cognitive function.
      4. Relate the relationship of ethnicity/culture, context and purposeful activity for geriatric intervention.
      5. Relate the impact of sensory changes and impairment to function with the elderly.
      6. Relate and describe signs and symptoms of elder abuse and neglect and the role of the OT practitioner.
      7. Compare and contrast the settings of OT intervention with aging populations.
    2. Analyze and apply occupational therapy intervention techniques and strategies for aging clients and their relationship to occupational performance and wellness/health promotion.
      1. Analyze data gathering and clinical reasoning with planning intervention for occupational performance areas.
      2. Formulate occupational goals and objectives appropriate for aging clients.
      3. Apply clinical reasoning to the intervention planning process and the relationship to functional tasks as it relates to aging clients.
      4. Distinguish and demonstrate instruction methods for aging clients, including those individuals with sensory and cognitive impairments.
      5. Analyze and demonstrate task breakdown for caregiver instruction and follow through for aging clients with cognitive dysfunction.
      6. Analyze and plan environmental modifications to address productive aging, sensory dysfunction and chronic conditions.
      7. Select, analyze and demonstrate appropriate activities to be used for the aging client that addresses context and areas of occupational performance.
      8. Organize and present community education outreach for aging populations.
      9. Discharge planning
    3. Apply basic skill competency with commonly used OT interventions that require consideration with aging clients.
      1. Apply planning and organizing skills to group activities to maximize health promotion and productive aging, engagement and participation with aged populations.
      2. Articulate and apply techniques to enhance community mobility.
        - Public transportation
        - Public access
        - Driver safety and rehabilitation
      3. Apply previous knowledge in the use of feeding techniques, swallowing difficulties, positioning, and the need for referral to other disciplines and the interprofessional team with aging clients.
      4. Apply learned principles and skill in organizing and documenting an interprofessional dining program to enable feeding/eating and training of caregivers in precautions and techniques.
      5. Develop and analyze methods for restraint reduction interventions, restraint free, or restraint reduced environments, and fall prevention.
      6. Relate clinical reasoning in application and integration of preparatory exercise and the relationship to function and wellness with aging clients.
      7. Describe, explain and apply where applicable specialized equipment and supportive medical devices that are utilized in a variety of treatment settings and with the aging population.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Factors that influence occupational performance, wellness and participation in occupational roles with the aging population
      1. Theories of aging
        1. Biological
        2. Social
      2. Aging process
        1. Changes
          1. Integumentary
          2. Neuromusculoskeletal
          3. Cardiopulmonary
          4. Immune
          5. Cognition
          6. Sensory
      3. Trends influencing aging
        1. Demographics
      4. Living arrangements and levels of care
        1. Intergenerational and generational cohorts
        2. Independent
        3. Levels of care
          1. Geropsychiatric unit
          2. Inpatient rehabilitation
          3. Adult foster home
          4. Skilled nursing facility
          5. Assisted living
          6. Home health care
          7. Hospice
          8. Adult day care
      5. Environment
        1. Assessment and interventions for environmental barriers
          1. Variety of living settings
      6. Context and culture
        1. Importance of context, family and social connections
        2. Application to intervention, instruction and therapeutic use of self
      7. Financial
        1. Impact to intervention and aging in place
        2. Limited access to healthcare, wants, needs and assistive devices
      8. Definitions and considerations with elder abuse and neglect
      9. Federal regulations and public policy affecting the aged population
        1. Payment and intervention
        2. Skilled and unskilled therapy
        3. Medicare and related regulations
        4. Minimum data set
        5. Prospective payment system
        6. Advocacy
        7. Keeping up with changes
    2. Aging and chronic conditions
      1. Stages of aging
      2. Developmental tasks
        1. Aging in place versus disengagement
      3. Aging process and sensory changes
        1. Impact to function and independence
        2. Environmental barriers
      4. Physical
        1. Chronic conditions
        2. Incontinence
          1. Assessment
          2. Intervention s and strategies
      5. Psychosocial and psychiatric conditions
        1. Assessment and intervention considerations
        2. Aspects of aging and myths
          1. Disengagement
          2. Isolation
          3. Grieving
          4. Social engagement
        3. Stressors, losses and emotions
        4. Social support
        5. Physical illness
        6. Learned helplessness
        7. Common mental health disorders in the aged population
          1. Depression
          2. Anxiety
          3. Suicide
          4. Dementia
          5. Substance abuse
            1. Alcohol
            2. Self-medication
          6. Aging with psychosis
          7. Mood disorders
      6. Cognitive
        1. Evaluation and assessment
          1. Normal aging process
          2. Dementia/Alzheimer’s
          3. Client context
        2. Interventions and strategies
          1. Environmental
          2. Client context
          3. Cuing
          4. Task breakdown
        3. Caregiver instruction and training
          1. Support
          2. Respite
          3. Resources
      7. Community mobility
        1. Pedestrian safety
        2. Alternative transportation
        3. Safe driving
          1. Evaluation
          2. Intervention
          3. Outcomes
          4. Resources and programs
      8. Sexuality
        1. Values
        2. Myths
        3. Homosexuality
        4. Age related changes
        5. Sexually transmitted diseases
        6. Health condition effects
          1. Cardiopulmonary
          2. Joint replacements
          3. Arthritis
        7. Role of the OTA
          1. Nursing facilities
          2. Education and counseling
    3. Intervention settings
      1. Level of Care
      2. In home
      3. Community care and organizations
      4. Wellness settings
      5. Comparisons
        1. Eden alternative
      6. Interprofessional and team collaboration
      7. Discharge planning
    4. Clinical reasoning and intervention planning
      1. Clinical reasoning application
        1. Models of practice
          1. OT practice frame work
          2. Characteristics of maturity
          3. Cognitive disabilities
          4. Model of human occupation
      2. Role of the OT and OTA
      3. Data gathering methods
        1. Screenings
        2. Assessments
          1. Vitals collect ion and application
          2. Case study application and competency skill
        3. Peer and interprofessional collaboration
      4. Formulating goals
      5. Selection of intervention methods and considerations
        1. Premorbid conditions
        2. Chronicity of conditions
        3. Wellness promotion
        4. Aging in place.
        5. Relationship to functional tasks
      6. Instruction methods for the aged, their families and caregivers
        1. Role of the OTA
        2. Considerations of instruction
          1. Changes in family roles
          2. Family resources
          3. Able and willing caregivers
            1. Caregiver stressors
        3. Effective communications
        4. Task breakdown techniques
        5. Instruction techniques for clients
        6. Instruction techniques for caregivers
    5. Intervention methods and strategies
      1. Concepts of health and wellness in OT practice with aging populations
        1. Prevention and health promotion
        2. Role of the OTA
      2. Selection of activities based on context and functional needs
      3. Environmental modifications
      4. Group application and organization
      5. Abuse and neglect of the aged client
        1. Types
        2. Signs and symptoms
        3. Able and willing caregivers
      6. Wellness promotion
        1. Eden alternative
          1. Principles
          2. Empowering clients and staff
        2. Feeding and eating needs
          1. Swallowing issues
          2. Assistive devices
          3. Interprofessional team and training others
          4. Precautions and contraindications
          5. Role of the OT and OTA
          6. Consult with other disciplines ie, speech, nursing, physicians, radiology
          7. Dining program
            1. Purpose and needs assessments
            2. Elements of programs
            3. Interprofessional team approach
      7. Restraint reduction methods and interventions for restraint free or reduced environments
        1. Omnibus Reconciliation Act
        2. Establishing a restrain reduction program
        3. Role of OT/OTA
        4. Interventions
          1. Environmental adaptations
          2. Psychosocial approaches
          3. Activity alternatives
        5. Communications and interprofessional approaches
      8. Fall prevention
        1. Risk factors
          1. Environmental
          2. Biological
          3. Cognitive and psychosocial
          4. Functional
        2. Evaluation and assessment
        3. Interventions
        4. Outcomes
      9. Exercise and the aged population
        1. Types
          1. Prescribed
          2. Tai chi
          3. Yoga
          4. Pilates
        2. Purpose
        3. Relationship to function
        4. Application to case study and competency skill
    6. The medical intervention environment
      1. Medications and function
        1. Polypharmacy
        2. Aging process
        3. Assessing self-medication
          1. Client factors
          2. Activity demands
        4. Strategies and assistive aids
      2. Specialized medical and supportive equipment
      3. Human patient simulator learning activity
      4. Role of the OT clinician

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2370 - Clinical Transition & Service Management

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2410, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450

    This course assists the student in the transition from student to clinical practice and comprehending the context of service delivery as a credentialed, entry-level practitioner. Role delineation and professional responsibilities will be emphasized, including service advocacy, application of management principles and ethics, aspects of service provision to individuals, organizations, and communities in the current healthcare environment, evidence-based research and implementation, communications, reimbursement issues, and principles for managing and adapting to change.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 2
    Billable Contact Hours: 2
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2370 are communication, professional accountability and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    Outcome 1: Articulate knowledge of various contexts, including professional, social, cultural, political, economic, and ecological in which occupational therapy services are provided.

    Objectives:

    1. Articulate the contexts of health care, education, community, and social systems as they relate to the practice, management and delivery of occupational therapy services.
    2. Articulate the potential impact of current policy issues and the social, economic, political, geographic, or demographic factors on the practice of occupational therapy.
    3. Articulate the role and responsibility of the practitioner to advocate for changes in service delivery policies, to effect changes in the system, and to recognize opportunities in emerging practice areas.
    4. Articulate the importance of using statistics, tests and measurements for the purpose of delivering evidence based practice.

    Outcome 2: Articulate knowledge of assistance of management responsibilities, and national and state credentialing requirements for delivery of occupational therapy services.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and articulate the impact of contextual factors on the management and delivery of occupational therapy services.
    2. Identify and articulate the systems and structures that create federal and state legislation and regulations and their implications and effects on occupational therapy practice.
    3. Articulate knowledge of applicable national requirements for credentialing and requirements for licensure, certification, or registration under state laws.
    4. Articulate knowledge regarding the various reimbursement systems and documentation requirements that affect the practice of occupational therapy.
    5. Demonstrate application in documentation of ongoing processes for quality improvement and implementing program changes as needed to ensure quality of services.
    6. Articulate the rationale for continuous quality improvement and its importance to occupational therapy services.
    7. Articulate strategies for effective, competency-based legal and ethical supervision of nonprofessional personnel.
    8. Articulate the ongoing professional responsibility/accountability for providing fieldwork education and the criteria for becoming a fieldwork educator.

    Outcome 3: Articulate knowledge of professional ethics, values, and scholarship in the delivery of occupational therapy services and professional accountability.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate knowledge regarding the application of the profession’s Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate and promote the role of the professional through knowledge of and involvement in international, national, state, and local occupational therapy associations and related professional associations.
    3. Demonstrate the promotion of occupational therapy through education of other professionals, service providers, consumers, third-party payers, regulatory bodies, and the public.
    4. Formulate strategies for ongoing professional development to ensure practice is consistent with current and accepted standards and the AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency.
    5. Recognize how to develop management competencies that are consistent with current and acceptable standards.
    6. Articulate core principles of conflict resolution and the application to the occupational therapy workplace.
    7. Articulate strategies for analyzing issues and making decisions to resolve personal and organizational ethical conflicts.
    8. Identify informal and formal systems for resolving ethical disputes that have jurisdiction over occupational therapy services.
    9. Articulate the importance of how scholarly activities and literature contribute to the development of the profession.
    10. Apply skill in effectively locating and understanding information, including the quality of the source of information.
    11. Articulate how scholarly activities can be used to evaluate professional practice, service delivery, and professional issues.
    12. Demonstrate the skills to read and understand a scholarly report and apply to evidence-based practice.
    13. Articulate the role of the OTA in evidence-based research.

    Outcome 4: Articulate knowledge and application of professional responsibilities of clinical management in the delivery of occupational therapy services.

    Objectives:

    1. Articulate professional responsibilities related to liability issues under current models of service provision/strategies.
    2. Articulate personal and professional abilities and competencies as relate to job responsibilities and the AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency.
    3. Articulate the variety of roles of the occupational therapy assistant practitioner, educator, and research assistant.
    4. Articulate and describe the need for supervisory roles, responsibilities, and collaborative professional relationships between the OT and the OTA.
    5. Articulate the professional responsibilities and issues when providing service on a contractual basis.
    6. Articulate strategies to assist consumers in gaining access to occupation therapy services.
    7. Articulate the role of the OTA in care coordination, case management with transition services in both traditional and emerging practice.

    Outcome 5: Determine skills and materials required for transition from graduate to entry-level practitioner.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate skill with career interview skills.
    2. Demonstrate skill with a professional portfolio.
    3. Demonstrate skill with a written resume.
    4. Demonstrate knowledge of NBCOT exam application and process

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction
      1. Healthcare trends and contexts
        1. Understanding the impact of the prevailing healthcare environment and current legislation
          1. Contexts of service delivery
            1. Professional
            2. Social systems
            3. Political
            4. Economic environment
            5. Ecological considerations
          2. Implications for healthcare professions
      2. The context and the impact of delivery of occupation therapy services
        1. Health care
        2. Education
        3. Community
        4. Social systems
        5. Impact of current legislation and reimbursement
    2. Potential impact of the current political climate to the practice and service delivery of occupational therapy
      1. Current policy issues
        1. Systems and structures that create federal and state legislation and regulations
        2. Impact to OT service delivery
      2. Social implications
      3. Economic implications
      4. Geographic considerations
      5. Demographic considerations
      6. Advocating change for changes in service delivery
        1. OT clinician’s role and responsibilities
        2. Effecting change in the system
        3. Recognizing opportunities in emerging areas of practice
    3. Impact of contextual factors on the management and delivery of occupational therapy services
      1. Reimbursement systems
      2. Documentation requirements
        1. Identifying providers and guidelines
      3. The ongoing process of quality improvement
        1. Providing evidence
        2. Scholarly activities and literature contributions
        3. Effectively locating and understanding the information
          1. Quality of the source
        4. Use of scholarly activities to evaluate professional practice, service delivery, and professional issues
        5. Applying the evidence to practice
      4. Implementing changes for quality improvement
        1. Meeting facility and accreditation standards
        2. Roles of the OTA
      5. Legal and ethical supervision
        1. Guidelines for supervision
          1. Competencies
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
          3. Nonprofessional personnel and supervision
      6. Providing fieldwork education
        1. Responsibilities
        2. Criteria required of fieldwork educators
        3. Transitioning students from academics to clinical practice
      7. Management responsibilities
        1. Defining management responsibilities
        2. Role delineation with OTR/OTA
          1. Articulate the need for supervisory roles
          2. Responsibilities
          3. Collaborative relationships
      8. Liability issues in current and changing models of providing service
      9. Providing services on a contractual basis
      10. Prompting and providing evidence-based practice
        1. Research resources
        2. Creating research
        3. Role of the OTA
    4. National and state credentialing requirements
      1. National requirements for credentialing
        1. NBCOT certification exam
        2. Obtaining certification
        3. Maintaining certification
          1. Ongoing professional development
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
      2. State requirements for licensure, certification or registration
        1. State laws
        2. Obtaining licensure in the State of Michigan
        3. Maintaining licensure in the State of Michigan
      3. Ongoing professional development
        1. Staying current and consistent
          1. Relationship of personal and professional abilities/competencies with job responsibilities
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
        2. Accepted standards of practice
    5. The application of professional practice elements
      1. Ethics of practice and application to management
        1. The OT Code of Ethics - review
        2. Systems for making decisions regarding personal and organizational ethical conflicts
        3. Jurisdiction over occupational therapy services
          1. Strategies for resolution in the workplace
      2. Involvement in professional organizations
        1. International
        2. National
        3. State
        4. Local
      3. Promoting the profession
        1. Education of:
          1. Other disciplines and interprofessional team members
          2. Service providers
          3. Consumers
          4. Third-party payers
          5. Regulatory bodies
          6. The public
        2. Assisting consumers in gaining access to OT services
    6. Roles of the OTA
      1. Practitioner
      2. Educator
      3. Research assistant
      4. Entrepreneur
      5. Emerging areas of practice
    7. Preparing for seeking positions
      1. Finding the right fit
      2. Interview skills and presenting yourself
      3. Professional portfolios
      4. Resumes
      5. Seeking a position
        1. Technology resource

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2402 - Skills for Occupational Therapy Documentation II

    Credit Hours: 1.50
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2410, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450

    Building upon the skills and knowledge acquired in OTAS 1401 - Skills for Occupational Therapy Documentation I, this lab-based course instructs the student in further development of competency-based application of documentation principles and skills. Adherence to AOTA guidelines, state licensure law and public health code, thirdparty reimbursement guidelines, regulations, appeals, confidentiality and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), screening and evaluation, intervention plans, long- and short-term goals/objectives, intervention notes, and discontinuation summaries will be applied to actual client intervention sessions. The emphasis of this course focuses on the application of observation, clinical reasoning, and demonstration of skilled competency in documentation.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Competent analysis and application of documentation guidelines and formats.
      1. Analyze and demonstrate competency in documentation content.
      2. Apply knowledge of the legal implications of documentation.
      3. Apply knowledge of third-party payer guidelines and state regulations.
      4. Apply knowledge of medical record formats.
      5. Apply knowledge of approved abbreviations and professional terminology.
      6. Apply confidentiality/HIPAA regulations and demonstrate the consequences of breaching the guidelines and principles.
      7. Identify and demonstrate documentation formats into electronic medical records.
      8. Apply knowledge of skilled OT service criteria with documentation of intervention.
    2. A competent basic analysis and application in OT documentation and formats.
      1. Apply observation to OT documentation.
      2. Apply clinical reasoning to OT documentation, utilizing the OT practice framework.
      3. Apply competency in basic interpretation of OT evaluation results to establish functional problem statements with intervention planning, progress notes and discontinuation summaries.
      4. Apply the use of approved abbreviations and accepted and legal professional terminology in documentation.
      5. Apply methods of correcting documentation.
      6. Relate the components of OT evaluations and commonly used assessment tools in documentation.
      7. Relate knowledge in the application of the components of OT intervention plans.
      8. Relate knowledge in the application of the components of long-term goals writing.
      9. Relate knowledge and apply the components of short-term goals or objective writing.
      10. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of SOAP notes writing.
      11. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of narrative notes writing.
      12. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of discontinuation summary writing.
      13. Relate knowledge in the analyzing and application of the role of the OT/OTA in OT documentation.
    3. Competent adherence to reimbursement guidelines and regulations for reimbursement of OT services.
      1. Demonstrate correct application in the documentation of skilled OT services, adhering to reimbursement guidelines.
      2. Demonstrate knowledge and competency with the Medicare review process, the appeals and reconsideration process and the implications to OT practice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review of the Basics
      1. Documentation
        1. Types of documentation and its purpose
      2. Legal document implications
        1. Descriptive vs interpretive statements
        2. Documenting for court
      3. Acceptable way to correct errors in a legal document
      4. Confidentiality with medical records and information
        1. HIPAA
        2. State licensure law and public health code
        3. Facility
        4. Departmental and inter-professional team
      5. Documenting the distinct value of OT intervention
        1. Skilled versus unskilled intervention
    2. Review of OT/OTA Responsibilities
      1. Roles of OT/OTA with documentation
      2. AOTA guidelines regarding documentation for OT/OTA
      3. Requirements and guidelines of third-party payers
      4. Credentials and signatures in documentation
      5. Variety of settings and responsibilities
    3. Analyzing use of Professional Terminology
      1. Professional terminology and accepted abbreviations when completing documentation assignments
      2. Applying the OT practice framework terminology and its distinct application to skilled OT services in documentation
      3. Identifying, formulating and applying occupational therapy problems
        1. Application of the OTPF and correct terminology
    4. Problem Oriented Medical Record (POMR)
      1. SOAP format
      2. Narrative format
      3. Application of clinical reasoning
    5. Application of Activity Analysis and Observation Skills into OT Documentation
      1. Gathering and utilizing client information from the medical record and the OT evaluation to establish functional problem statements, goals and document client performance
      2. Applying observation skills in accurate documentation of performance in objective terms
      3. Applying activity analysis to synthesis intervention and performance data to intervention documentation
      4. Applying clinical reasoning skills to substantiate medical necessity through professional assessment and documentation
      5. Documentation of skilled services versus non-skilled services
        1. Professional assessment
        2. Substantiation of services
        3. Reasonable and medically necessary intervention
    6. Application of Functional OT Goals/Performance Objectives
      1. Application and documentation of functional long and short-term occupational therapy goals
      2. Application and documentation of performance objectives which includes the instructional variable, observable behavior, measurement and proficiency.
    7. Developing, Documenting and Interpreting an Intervention Plan
      1. Documenting intervention plans with focus on function and OTPF
      2. De-emphasizing the methods and modalities
        1. Applying function to the intervention and documentation of the client’s response to intervention
    8. Documentation in Narrative Format
      1. Progress and discharge note using the narrative format
      2. Applying clinical reasoning, client response and professional assessment
    9. Documenting in SOAP Format
      1. Progress and discharge note using the SOAP format
      2. Applying clinical reasoning, client response and professional assessment
    10. Reconsideration and Appeals Process
      1. Denial/appeals process
      2. Implications to reimbursement
      3. Types of appeal letters
    11. Identifying and Applying Required Documentation Content to a Variety of Documentation Formats
    12. Electronic Medical Records and Documentation / Incorporating Documentation Content into the EMR

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2410 - Advanced Physical Rehabilitation Lecture

    Credit Hours: 3.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450

    This course provides the student with knowledge in the theories, protocols and procedures, and application of intervention for clients referred to physical dysfunction in a variety of occupational therapy settings. The course material emphasizes evaluation and screening, intervention applications, and skill building appropriate for the occupational therapy assistant. The course will examine practice models, frame of reference application, and evidenced-based approaches for occupational performance and participation.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. The application and analysis of occupational therapy process and frame of references for intervention methods for clients with physical dysfunction.
      1. Utilize the occupational therapy process with physical dysfunction clients.
      2. Occupational therapy screening and evaluation, and intervention with physical dysfunction clients.
      3. The use of occupational therapy practice models utilized with physical dysfunction intervention.
      4. The application of frame of references with physical dysfunction intervention.
      5. Evidence-based practice methods relating clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      6. The roles and responsibilities of the OTA and OT.
    2. Analysis and application of occupational therapy screening and evaluation utilized with clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Apply the screening and evaluation process for ADL assessments, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      2. Apply the screening and evaluation process for range of motion assessments, and its application to evidence-based practice.
        1. a. Active range of motion
        2. b. Passive range of motion
        3. c. Functional range of motion
      3. Apply the screening and evaluation process for functional muscle testing, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      4. Apply the screening and evaluation process of muscle tone, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      5. Apply the screening and evaluation process of activity tolerance, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      6. Apply the screening and evaluation process of balance, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      7. Apply the screening and evaluation process of gross and fine motor coordination, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      8. Apply the screening and evaluation process for sensation, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      9. Apply the screening and evaluation process for cognition, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      10. Apply the screening and evaluation process for perception, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      11. Apply the screening and evaluation process of Instrumental Activities of Daily Living (IADL), and its application to evidence-based practice.
      12. Apply the screening and evaluation process for evaluation of work, leisure, and social participation, and its application to evidence-based practice.
    3. Application of occupational therapy intervention utilized with a variety of clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Articulate and apply the purpose and protocols for ADL intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
      2. Articulate and apply the purpose of range of motion intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for range of motion activities.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      3. Articulate and apply the purpose of muscle strengthening interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for muscle strengthening activities.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      4. Articulate and apply the purpose of motor control interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
      5. Articulate and apply the purpose of activity tolerance intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for activity tolerance.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      6. Articulate and apply the purpose of balance interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for balance.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      7. Articulate and apply the purpose of gross and fine motor coordination and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based activities for gross and fine motor coordination.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      8. Articulate and apply the purpose of sensation retraining and compensatory techniques and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based activities for sensation retraining and compensatory techniques.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      9. Articulate and apply the purpose of cognition retraining and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention methods for cognitive retraining.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      10. Articulate and apply the purpose of perception intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention methods for perceptual training.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      11. Articulate and apply the purpose of IADL intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate the analysis of a given intervention for grading, application, modification and outcomes of an activity.
        2. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      12. Articulate and apply the purposes of work, leisure, and social participation and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification and outcomes of an activity.
        2. Articulate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
    4. Articulating, analyzing, and demonstrating intervention application with a given diagnosis providing evidence and rationale to support selected interventions.
      1. Articulate the analysis of a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and outcomes of an activity.
      2. Articulate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      3. Articulate evidence-based practice to support rationale for intervention selection.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Occupational Therapy Process
      1. Evaluation
        1. Occupational profile
        2. Occupational analysis
      2. Intervention
        1. Planning
        2. Implementation
        3. Re-evaluation
      3. Outcomes
    2. Frame of Reference
      1. Model of Human Occupation
      2. Biomechanical
      3. Occupation adaptation
      4. Person-Environment-Occupation Model
      5. Rehabilitation Model
    3. Models of Practice
      1. Biomechanical approach
      2. Sensorimotor approach
      3. Rehabilitation approach
    4. Practice Considerations in Physical Dysfunction and Clinical Application
      1. Vitals
        1. Blood pressure
        2. Pulse
        3. Respiration
        4. Pulse oximetry
      2. Medical complications
      3. Safety issues
      4. Contraindications and medical precautions
      5. Lab values
      6. Intravenous lines
      7. Oxygen use/nasal cannula
      8. Pressure ulcers
      9. Fall risk
      10. Isolation precautions
      11. Seizure
      12. Indwelling catheters
      13. OSHA and health care employees
      14. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
    5. Acute Care
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
    6. Inpatient Rehabilitation (IPR)
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
      5. Functional Independence Measure (FIM)
    7. Sub-acute Rehabilitation
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
      5.  Minimum data set and resource utilization groups
    8. Outpatient
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Current trends
    9. Home Health Care
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Current trends
    10. Methods of Screening and Evaluation, Assessment Tools, and Protocols
      1. ADL
      2. Range of motion
      3. Muscle strength
        1. Functional muscle testing
        2. Manual muscle testing (muscle groups)
      4. Motor control
        1. Neurodevelopmental approach (NDT/Bobath)
        2. Rood approach
        3. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation (PNF)
        4. Constraint-Induced Movement Therapy
        5. Brunnstrom approach
      5. Activity tolerance
      6. Balance
        1. Standing
          1. Static and dynamic
        2. Sitting
          1. Static and dynamic
      7. Coordination
      8. Sensation
      9. Cognition
      10. Perception
      11. IADL
      12. Work
      13. Leisure
      14. Social participation
    11. Delineation and Application of Activities and Interventions Methods
      1. Occupational based activities
      2. Purposeful activities
      3. Preparatory activities
      4. Analysis
      5. Grading
      6. Modification
      7. Outcomes
    12. OT Process and Intervention Application in Clinical Practice
      1. Application to a given client diagnosis
      2. Analysis for gradation, application, modification and expected outcomes
      3. Evidence-based support for selected interventions
      4. Contraindications and precautions with intervention approaches
      5. Discharge planning and outcomes

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2425 - Advanced Physical Rehabilitation-Lab

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361,OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2410, and OTAS 2450

    This course teaches the screening and evaluation protocols and the application of various intervention techniques, methods and skills utilized with individuals referred to a physical dysfunction occupational therapy setting. Emphasis is placed on skill acquisition and demonstration of the occupational therapy process, utilizing the administration of screening and assessment tools, and a variety of interventions, appropriate for the role of the occupational therapy assistant. This course focuses on competency based learning and clinical reasoning.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 4
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Clinical reasoning analysis and competent application of occupational therapy screening and assessment tools for the purpose of delivering evidence-based practice.
      1. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of ADL screening and evaluation.
      2. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of screening and evaluation of feeding/eating.
      3. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of functional range of motion screening.
      4. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of range of motion screening and evaluation, utilizing goniometric measurement tools.
      5. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of manual muscle testing and functional muscle testing.
      6. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of evaluating grip and pinch strength, utilizing pinch gauge and dynamometer as assessment measurement tools.
      7. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of muscle tone.
      8. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of activity tolerance.
      9. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of balance, utilizing a variety of evaluation methods.
      10. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of coordination.
      11. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of sensation.
      12. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of cognition.
      13. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of perception.
      14. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of IADL, and the use of assistive devices and adaptive methods.
      15. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of work, leisure, and social participation.
      16. Describe the role of the OT and OTA in occupational therapy screening and evaluation, along with the importance of, and the rationale for supervision and collaborative work with physical dysfunction clients.
    2. Clinical reasoning, analysis and appreciation of skill, planning and safe selection of preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based interventions with adult clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Apply skill in the application of the OT process, frames of reference and clinical reasoning to various interventions.
      2. Apply competent skill, planning, and the selection of diagnostic specific methods for bed positioning and mobility.
      3. Apply competent skill in ADL intervention, including the utilization of assistive devices and adaptive techniques, for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      4. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection for range of motion interventions for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      5. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection for muscle strengthening interventions for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      6. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of muscle re-education techniques for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      7. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of activity tolerance for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      8. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of balance intervention to promote outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      9. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of fine and gross motor coordination for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      10. Apply competent skill, planning, and selection of activities for remediation and compensation of sensory deficits for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      11. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of cognitive retraining and intervention for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      12. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of perceptual deficits for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      13. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in IADL performance, utilizing assistive devices and adaptive techniques for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      14. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in work performance for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      15. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in leisure and social participation performance for outcomes and the promotion of health and wellness.
      16. Model the role of the OTA in a collaborative partnership with the OT in physical dysfunction interventions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Occupation Therapy Process
      1. Evaluation
        1. Occupational profile
        2. Occupational analysis
      2. Intervention
        1. Planning
        2. Implementation
        3. Re-evaluation
      3. Outcomes
    2. Application of OT Practice Framework
      1. Areas of occupation
      2. Client factors
      3. Activity demands
      4. Performance skills
      5. Performance patterns
      6. Context
    3. Application of Models of Practice
      1. Biomechanical approach
      2. Sensorimotor approach
      3. Rehabilitative approach
    4. Safety
      1. Environment
      2. Medical complications and precautions
      3. Diagnosis specific considerations
        1. Orthopedic diagnoses
          1. Attention to incision site
          2. Attention to hip precautions
          3. Attention to weight bearing status
          4. Attention to pain tolerance
          5. Attention to braces
        2. Neurological diagnoses
          1. Attention to indwelling catheter
          2. Attention to safety precautions
          3. Attention to pain tolerance
          4. Attention to orthostatic hypotension
          5. Attention to visual neglect/hemianopsia
          6. Attention to cognitive deficits
    5. Screening and Evaluation Methods (Standardized and Non-Standardized)
      1. Activities of daily living (ADL)
      2. Range of motion
      3. Manual muscle testing and functional muscle testing
      4. Motor control
      5. Activity tolerance
      6. Balance
      7. Coordination
      8. Sensation
      9. Cognition
      10. Perception
      11. Instrumental activities of daily living (IADL)
      12. Work
      13. Leisure
      14. Social participation
      15. Re-evaluation utilizing OTA and OT collaboration
      16. Discharge planning applying outcome-based interventions and criteria utilized for appropriate termination of occupational therapy services
    6. Evaluation and Activity Selection in Positioning and Bed Mobility
      1. Positioning techniques to prevent deformities, contractures, and pressure ulcers
      2. Bed mobility and positioning
      3. Application to occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    7. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Activities of Daily Living (ADL) Intervention
      1. ADL adaptive techniques
        1. Application of one-handed dressing techniques
        2. Adaptive self-care techniques interventions
      2. Assistive devices
        1. Dressing
        2. Bathing
        3. Grooming
        4. Feeding
          1. Swallowing problems
          2. Assistive devices, compensatory techniques, facilitation/ inhibition techniques
          3. Precautions and contraindications
          4. Interprofessional/caregiver instruction
          5. Role of OT/OTA
      3. Expected clinical outcomes
    8. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Range of Motion Intervention
      1. Evaluation utilizing a variety of goniometers
      2. Functional screening
      3. Active range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      4. Passive range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      5. Active assist range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      6. Self-range of motion techniques from bed, wheelchair, and mat
      7. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      8. Expected clinical outcomes
    9. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Muscle Strengthening Intervention
      1. Use of muscle grades
      2. Grading resistive activities and exercises
      3. Types of exercise
        1. Isotonic
        2. Isometric
      4. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention utilizing interpretation of muscle grade measurement
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    10. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Neuromuscular Re-education Intervention Approaches
      1. Neurodevelopmental approach (NDT)
      2. Rood approach
      3. Proprioceptive neuromuscular facilitation (PNF)
      4. Constraint-induced movement therapy
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    11. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Activity Tolerance Intervention
      1. Screening
      2. Grades of activity tolerance
    12. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Balance Intervention
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Protocols and procedure application of assessment tools
      3. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    13. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Gross and Fine Motor Coordination Intervention
      1. Screening and evaluation
        1. Gross motor
        2. Fine motor
      2. Protocols and procedure application with standardized assessment tools
      3. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    14. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Sensory Deficits
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Sensory retraining activities
      3. Compensatory strategies
      4. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    15. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Cognitive Deficits
      1. Retraining techniques
      2. Compensatory strategies
      3. Expected clinical outcomes
    16. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Perceptual Deficits
      1. Visual acuity
      2. Visual conditions
      3. Retraining techniques
      4. Compensatory strategies
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    17. Evaluation and Activity Selection for IADL Interventions
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Interventions utilizing assistive devices and adaptive techniques
      3. Expected clinical outcomes

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2450 - Level 1 Fieldwork-Second Placement

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300, OTAS 1351, OTAS 1361, OTAS 1370, OTAS 1401, OTAS 1420, and OTAS 1450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, and OTAS 2402

    (formerly OTAS 2420)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience to give the beginning level 1 student an opportunity for continued practice of basic occupational therapy interventions under the guidance of a qualified fieldwork educator.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 8 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 4
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2450 are communication, clinical reasoning, professional accountability and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Demonstrate beginning ability to integrate academic learning with clinical practice and its relationship to occupational performance.
    2. Demonstrate ability to gather an occupational profile through a client-centered approach including medical chart review, interviews and clinical observation of performance.
    3. Demonstrate beginning ability to interpret information gathered via observation of the client’s occupational performance to formulate appropriate occupational therapy treatment interventions.
    4. Demonstrate implementation of intervention treatment techniques utilizing occupation-based activities learned in class, or those used at the fieldwork site, under the supervision of the fieldwork educator and in collaboration with the client, caregiver and family
    5. Document the client’s performance utilizing the occupational therapy practice framework.
    6. Demonstrate awareness and intervention of safety issues throughout the client’s occupational performance.
    7. Demonstrate knowledge of roles and functions of other related team members working with clients.
    8. Demonstrate effective beginning intervention through written, oral/non-verbal communication with clients, families, peers, supervision and other health providers in a professional manner.
    9. Demonstrate beginning skills of collaboration with occupation therapist and other interprofessional team members.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction
      1. Course sequence, requirements, expectations of student performance and competencies.
    2. Didactic Portion
      1. Universal Precautions
        1. Follow universal precautions while engaged in patient care
          1. Hand washing techniques
          2. Air-borne and blood-borne pathogens
        2. Hepatitis B vaccinations or waiver
      2. Observation Techniques
        1. Behavioral vs. interpretive
        2. Documentation techniques
        3. Communication skills
          1. Utilize observation and communication skills while engaging the client in occupation-based interventions
      3. Professionalism
        1. Dress code
        2. Responding to constructive criticism
        3. AOTA Code of Ethics
    3. Fieldwork Portion
      1. Observation: Refers to the act of seeing, but more importantly, seeing with attention to specific elements and details so that it becomes possible to make tentative statements about what has been seen. Students will receive some guidance as to what is to be observed.
      2. Participation: Implies a shared involvement in occupation-based interventions. The student must take responsibility for their learning, including professional accountability and communication.
      3. Affective domain: Evaluation of the student in the affective domain is aimed at objectively assessing those personal traits and attitudes which are viewed as essential to the growth and development of the student, not only as a practitioner but as a well-integrated person. Traits and attitudes to be considered will include:
        1. General appearance: appropriate attire each day, appropriate footwear, presents self appropriately.
        2. Dependability: attends clinicals, arrives on time, carries out assignment, follows direction accurately, accepts responsibility within capabilities.
        3. Ability to accept supervision: accepts feedback objectively, profits from suggestions, can engage on collaborative relationships, not passive-dependent, accepts guidance and feedback.
        4. Attitude: positive, realistic, willingness to accept new and different ideas.
        5. Initiative: seeks out information, assumes responsibility for learning, does not need prodding, can assume responsibility for tasks within capacity, follows through on own where appropriate.
        6. Interpersonal relationship: comfortable with client and staff, able to initiate conversation with client, viewed positively by others, adjusts to situations.
        7. Ability to communicate: expresses self clearly both orally and in writing, spells correctly, uses terminology appropriately, speaks with assurance.

    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2580 - Level 2 Fieldwork-First Placement

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 2095, OTAS 2350, OTAS 2370, OTAS 2402, OTAS 2410, OTAS 2425, and OTAS 2450 all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2590

    (formerly OTAS 2480)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience for the advanced student who will apply therapeutic techniques and practice competent entry-level clinical applications under the supervision of a qualified clinician.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 40 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 7
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Fundamental of Practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice in adherence to the Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice in adherence of safety regulations and use of sound judgment in regard to safety of others.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Basic Tenets of Occupational Therapy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the value and beliefs of occupational therapy.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the roles of occupational therapy personnel.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice in the use of informed decisions based on relevant resources.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Evaluation and Screening.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to collect data.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to administer assessments.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to interpret assessments.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to report assessment findings accurately.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to establish intervention goals.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Treatment Interventions.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to plan interventions.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to select and sequence relevant interventions.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to implement occupation-based interventions effectively.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to analyze and grade treatment interventions.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of therapeutic use of self to facilitate intervention goals.
    6. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to modify intervention plan as indicated by the client.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Communication Skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective verbal and nonverbal communications.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective written communications.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Professional Behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of self-responsibility in attaining professional competence.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of positive response to constructive feedback.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of consistent work behavior including, initiative, preparedness, dependability, cooperation, flexibility, tact, empathy, time management and work site maintenance.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of respect for cultural diversity factors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Refer AOTA Evaluation Form & to site-specific objectives.

    Student will focus on all stages of the OT process in collaboration with the supervising OTR or COTA. Focus of this experience will vary, depending on the location of the fieldwork experience. Application of OT theory, treatment approaches, frames of reference, documentation skills and communication skills will be covered.


    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2590 - Level 2 Fieldwork-Second Placement

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program

    Corequisites: OTAS 2580

    (formerly OTAS 2490)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience for the advanced student to continue to apply therapeutic techniques and practice competent entry-level clinical applications under the supervision of a qualified clinician.

    Location: Center Campus

    Contact Hours: 40 per week for 8 weeks
    Billable Contact Hours: 7
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Fundamental of Practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate adherence to the Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate adherence of safety regulations and use of sound judgment in regard to safety of others.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Basic Tenets of Occupational Therapy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the value and beliefs of occupational therapy.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the roles of occupational therapy personnel.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice in the use of informed decisions based on relevant resources.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Evaluation and Screening.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to collect data.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to administer assessments.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to interpret assessments.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to report assessment findings accurately.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to establish intervention goals.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Treatment Interventions.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to plan interventions.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to select and sequence relevant interventions.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to implement occupation-based interventions effectively.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to analyze and grade treatment interventions.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of therapeutic use of self to facilitate intervention goals.
    6. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to modify intervention plan as indicated by the client.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Communication Skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective verbal and nonverbal communications.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective written communications.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Professional Behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of self-responsibility in attaining professional competence.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of positive response to constructive feedback.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of consistent work behavior including initiative, preparedness, dependability, cooperation, flexibility, tact, empathy, time management and work site maintenance.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of respect for cultural diversity factors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Refer to AOTA Fieldwork Evaluation Form & site-specific objectives.

    Student will focus on all stages of the OT process in collaboration with the supervising OT or OTA. Focus of this experience will vary, depending on the location of the fieldwork experience. Application of OT theory, treatment approaches, frames of reference, documentation skills and communication skills will be covered.


    Primary Faculty
    Clements, Phyllis
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Philosophy

  
  • PHIL 2010 - Introduction to Philosophy

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Designed to show the relevance of philosophical problems to the student himself. The student is challenged to develop a consistent response to such problems as: free will versus determinism, the limits of knowledge, the basis of good and evil, personal conscience versus legal obligation, etc. Traditional and modern philosophers are read for discussion and critical evaluation.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify various philosophical positions.
    2. Identify various philosophical problems
    3. Identify various philosophical arguments.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate a facility with the vocabulary of philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of philosophy.
    2. Define the vocabulary of philosophy.
    3. Apply the vocabulary of philosophy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify premises inherent in philosophical arguments.
    2. Identify the assumptions inherent in philosophical arguments.
    3. Analyze the implications of philosophical arguments.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. An introduction to various philosophies
    2. An examination of various philosophical arguments and terms
    3. An examination of some major philosophers
    4. An investigation of some major areas of philosophy, e.g. metaphysics and epistemology

    Primary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Secondary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHIL 2100 - Introduction to Ethics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A critical examination of the foundation of various ethical systems. Specific ethical problems are posed especially those which relate to the student’s situation and possible solutions are discussed. Students will be challenged to define and defend their ethical position against alternative systems.

    Contact Hours: 3
    Billable Contact Hours: 3
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify various ethical positions.
    2. Identify various ethical problems.
    3. Identify various ethical arguments.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a facility with the vocabulary of ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of ethics.
    2. Define the vocabulary of ethics.
    3. Apply the vocabulary of ethics.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify premises inherent in ethical arguments/theories.
    2. Identify the assumptions inherent in ethical arguments/theories.
    3. Analyze the implications of ethical arguments/theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. An introduction to various ethical theories
    2. An examination of various ethical arguments and terms
    3. An examination of some major ethical thinkers
    4. An investigation of some contemporary ethical issues

    Primary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Secondary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10